═══ 1. View, definition ═══ A view is a graphical representation of your network resources. The LAN Network Manager program indicates the status of a resource by using different colors and fill patterns for the graphical elements it displays. The elements displayed in a view can include nodes, links, text, tackpoints, and a background picture. The LAN Network Manager program supports network level, segment level, and CAU level views. This is an example of a view. ═══ 2. Double-click, definition ═══ Double-click means to press and release the mouse button twice, quickly, without moving the mouse. Double-clicking on a node or link is a quick way to access information. For example, if you double-click on a segment, the Segment Information/Status window appears. ═══ 3. Text, definition ═══ You can add text to a view. For example, you can add a note, a user name, a phone number, or the name of a city. The LAN Network Manager program provides four text fields for each node or link. You can specify which of these text labels appear by selecting the Display labels option from the View pull-down menu. You can also enter text that the LAN Network Manager program does not associate with a resource. To add free text to the view, select the Add text/tackpoints option from the Edit pull-down menu. You can select free text individually. ═══ 4. Tackpoint, definition ═══ A tackpoint is a graphical object in a view that creates a bending point in a link. Tackpoints generally do not represent physical objects and are visible only when the select function is used to select either tackpoints or the links of which they are a part. A visible tackpoint is a small, white square at a bend in a link. You can add, delete, and move tackpoints. ═══ 5. Using the keyboard to add tackpoints ═══ To use the keyboard to add tackpoints in a view, do the following: 1. Select Add tackpoints on the Edit pull-down menu. The mouse pointer changes to a tackpoint pointer when it is positioned over a link. 2. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position in the link where you want the tackpoint. The link bends as you position the tackpoint. Press the spacebar. 3. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view. This picture is an example of what a view looks like after you add tackpoints. You can exit Add Tackpoints by: o Pressing the Esc key. o Double-clicking mouse button 2. o Selecting Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. ═══ 6. Unavailable actions, definition ═══ The choices in a pull-down menu from the action bar are sometimes in a muted color, which means that they are not available. This can also be true for input fields in a window. Possible reasons that an action bar choice or a field is unavailable include the following: o You have not selected an object on which to perform the action. For example, if you do not select a segment on the Segments window, the choices from the Actions pull-down menu are not available. After you select a segment, the choices are available. The same is true for objects in a view. For example, if you do not select a node or link, the Profile option on the Actions pull-down menu is not available. o You have not entered data in a required field. For example, if you are adding a Controlled Access Unit (CAU) definition on the Controlled Access Unit Definition window, the Add pushbutton is not available until you enter the CAU ID. o The LAN Network Manager program is not authorized to change the information in the field. For example, if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program to monitor network activity, you cannot change certain fields on a bridge's Configuration Parameters window. Help is always available for any action, whether or not the action is currently available. To access help, click and hold mouse button 1 on the option, then press F1. If you are using a keyboard, press F10 to move to the action bar, then use the arrow keys to select the option and press F1. ═══ 7. Hop count for subnet, definition ═══ The hop count is the number of node-to-node links you want to display for a selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9. For example, to see all the resources that are up to five links away from Resource A, specify a hop count of 5. ═══ 8. Node, definition ═══ A node is a graphical symbol used in a view to represent a resource or a group of resources, such as a workstation or a LAN segment. To see a description of the node symbols used in views, select Legend on the Options pull-down menu, then select Symbol from the cascading menu. ═══ 9. Resource, definition ═══ A resource is any component of your network that is managed by the LAN Network Manager program. Resources include segments, stations, bridges, and Controlled Access Units (CAUs). In a view of your network, a resource can be represented by either a node or a link. ═══ 10. Link, definition ═══ A link is a graphical symbol used in a view to represent the bridge connection between two nodes. The kind of link symbol used in the view indicates whether the bridge is operating as a local bridge or a remote bridge: o If the bridge is a local bridge, the link is represented by a straight line. o If the bridge is a remote bridge, the link is represented by a jagged line. If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to that bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the link changes to a solid line. To see the link symbols used in views, select Legend on the Options pull-down menu, then select Symbol from the cascading menu. ═══ 11. Label, definition ═══ A label is an identifier that the LAN Network Manager program associates with a particular node or link. A label might be an address, an icon, or a name. You can display or hide these labels at specific zoom levels by selecting Display labels on the View pull-down menu. ═══ 12. Background picture, definition ═══ A background picture is an image that you can add to a view. Background pictures can be complex images, such as maps, floor plans, or school layouts. Background pictures are OS/2(T) metafiles. You can add and delete, but not modify, background pictures. You can use the OS/2 Convert Picture File utility to convert other picture file types (such as .PIF) to metafiles and include them in your views as background pictures. This is an example of a background picture. ═══ 13. Scroll bar, definition ═══ A scroll bar is a narrow section of a view window that allows you to move the view so you can see a part that is not currently displayed. A view window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You can use the vertical scroll bar (on the right side of the view window) to move the view display up and down. You can use the horizontal scroll bar (at the bottom of the view window) to move the view display left and right. The slider box on the scroll bar indicates how much of the view is displayed. When you first open a view, the entire view is displayed. Therefore, the sliders fill both the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. If you zoom in on a part of the view, the size of the sliders changes to indicate that the entire view is not displayed. To scroll to another part of the view, position the mouse pointer on the slider and, while holding mouse button 1 down, move the slider. You can also click on the scroll bar arrows or use the arrow keys to scroll through a view. To scroll one screen at a time in any direction, click on the area between the slider and the scroll bar arrows. You can also scroll using the keyboard. ═══ 14. Path cost, definition ═══ A value, maintained by each bridge, that indicates the relative length of the path between a centrally-located bridge (the root bridge) and another bridge. Each bridge's path cost is equal to the sum of the path cost increments of the bridges between it and the root bridge, plus its own path cost increment. The path cost for the root bridge is zero. ═══ 15. Beaconing, definition ═══ Beaconing is a state in which an adapter on the segment is repeatedly transmitting a message that it is not receiving a normal signal. This indicates a serious network problem, such as a broken cable, a power failure, or an adapter inserted at the wrong speed. The adapter continues to beacon until the error is corrected or bypassed. ═══ 16. Continuous carrier, definition ═══ On broadband networks, continuous carrier is a condition in which a carrier signal is being constantly broadcast on a given frequency. No further information can be modulated on that frequency. ═══ 17. Soft error, definition ═══ A soft error is an intermittent error on a network that causes data to have to be transmitted more than once to be received. A soft error affects the network's performance but does not, by itself, affect the network's overall reliability. If the number of soft errors becomes excessive, reliability is affected. ═══ 18. Managed domain, definition ═══ The managed domain is made up of the segment that the LAN Network Manager program is on and all segments to which it is linked by bridges. Network management functions (such as adapter monitoring, tracing authorization, and Controlled Access Unit (CAU) registration) are limited to this domain. ═══ 19. Weight Conditions ═══ Weight is a measure of the number of soft errors that an adapter is experiencing. When the ring error monitor (REM) receives a soft error report from a station on the ring, this information is used to accumulate weight against the reporting station and its nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN). The weight accumulated for a particular station indicates the likelihood that the station is causing excessive soft errors on the ring. The REM compares the accumulated weights for the adapters on the ring to a threshold value. Pre-Weight-Exceeded Condition The REM sends this notification when an adapter's accumulated weight exceeds 50% of the threshold value. This condition indicates that excessive soft errors are causing a potential problem on the ring and might soon degrade network performance. Weight-Exceeded Condition The REM initially sends this notification when an adapter's accumulated weight reaches the threshold value. It periodically repeats this notification as long as the adapter's accumulated weight exceeds 50% of the threshold value. This condition indicates that the ring is experiencing a serious soft error problem, which is significantly impacting network performance. ═══ 20. Spanning-Tree Protocol ═══ Spanning-tree protocol is used between bridges in a LAN to ensure that a single path exists between any two stations in the network. The IBM(T) Token-Ring Network uses the spanning-tree protocol called single-route broadcast to maintain a single path between any two LAN segments in the network for single-route broadcast messages used in route discovery. Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 LANs use the spanning-tree protocol to allow only one of two or more parallel bridges to forward frames. If more than one parallel bridge in an Ethernet domain is allowed to forward frames, the frames can loop endlessly in the network. If there are parallel IBM 8209 LAN Bridges between a Token-Ring Network and an Ethernet network, the spanning-tree protocol is used to allow only one bridge to forward frames at any one time. The bridge that is authorized to forward frames is called the designated bridge, and the other parallel bridges are called stand-by bridges. The designated bridge enters the data forwarding state, and the stand-by bridges remain in the blocking state. If the designated bridge fails for any reason, the spanning-tree protocol causes a parallel stand-by bridge to enter the forwarding state. One bridge in the network (the root bridge) sends a message at a specified interval (the hello time) to help maintain the domain awareness of designated and stand-by bridges. ═══ 21. Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) ═══ Bridges exchange bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) to monitor the single-route broadcast path and to adjust this path whenever conditions on the network require it. The information in the BPDUs, such as bridge ID and path cost, enables the bridges in the network to do the following: o Determine which role a newly active bridge should assume o Determine whether a bridge is a parallel bridge or in a parallel path o Determine which one of two or more parallel bridges should have single-route broadcast active o Detect when the root bridge or a designated bridge has left the network o Reassign the bridge roles as necessary when bridges enter and leave the network. ═══ 22. Limited mode operation ═══ If the LAN Network Manager adapter is unable to connect to the network and communicate with the other resources, the LAN Network Manager program can still run, but only with a subset of the functions available to it during normal operation. You can access historical data about the network from the database, if such data exists, and you can perform other tasks that do not require direct communication with the network, such as configuring system parameters and manipulating resource definitions. Functions that are not available to you in limited mode are greyed. ═══ 23. Ring Parameter Server ═══ The ring parameter server provides the ring number to an adapter when the adapter is attached to the ring, and sends a notification to one or more network management programs when a new adapter has attached to the ring. ═══ 24. Ring Error Monitor ═══ The ring error monitor performs the following functions: o Compiles error statistics reported by adapters on the network o Analyzes the statistics to determine a probable cause of errors degrading ring operation o Updates status conditions for the network o Sends reports to indicate critical problems to the network management programs that have requested reports. ═══ 25. Configuration Report Server ═══ The configuration report server (CRS) sends notifications about the current active configuration for each ring to the network management programs that request reports. The CRS reports changes in the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) addresses and active monitor on the ring. ═══ 26. Abbreviations ═══ API application programming interface APPC advanced program-to-program communications ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange CAU controlled access unit CLIST LAN Network Manager command list CRS configuration report server CSMA/CD carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CUA(T) Common User Access(T) DLC data link control DLL dynamic link library DOS disk operating system DSAP destination service access point EGA Enhanced Graphics Adapter KB kilobyte K kilobit LAN local area network LLC logical link control LU logical unit Mbps megabits per second NAUN nearest active upstream neighbor NETBIOS Network Basic Input Output System NMVT network management vector transport OS/2(T) EE 1.3 Operating System/2(T) Extended Edition Version 1.3 PC personal computer PM(T) Presentation Manager(T) PS/2(T) Personal System/2(T) PU physical unit REM ring error monitor RI ring in RO ring out RPL remote program loader RPS ring parameter server RPU remote program update RU request/response unit SAA(T) Systems Application Architecture(T) SAP service access point SDLC synchronous data link control SNA Systems Network Architecture SPCS service point command service SQL Structured Query Language SSAP source service access point SSCP system services control point TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol UPM User Profile Management VGA Video Graphics Array VTAM(T) Virtual Telecommunications Access Method(T) ═══ 27. IBM Trademark ═══ Trademark of IBM Corporation. ═══ 28. Novell Trademark ═══ Trademark of Novell, Inc. ═══ 29. Qualifier ═══ A qualifier is a segment that contains an Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and to which the LAN Network Manager program has a bridged path but no link. ═══ 30. Object, definition ═══ An object is an individual graphical unit in a view. Objects can be nodes, links, and free text. Background pictures, resource labels, and icons are not considered objects. You cannot select or manipulate them. ═══ 31. Region, definition ═══ A region is a collection of objects or resources that you can select and manipulate as a single unit. When you select a region, a selection box surrounds all the objects in the collection. ═══ 32. Selecting and deselecting objects ═══ To perform a task, you first select an object with the mouse, and then select the task to apply to that object. You can select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects. You can also use the keyboard to select and deselect an object. Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object To select a single object, move the mouse pointer to the object, and click mouse button 1. To deselect a single object, click mouse button 1 anywhere in the view except on the selected object. Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects To select more than one object one at a time, press and hold down the Ctrl key while you use the mouse to click on each object you want to select. To deselect more than one object, one at a time, press and hold down the Ctrl key while you use the mouse to click on each object you want to deselect. If you want to deselect all the objects at one time, click mouse button 1 anywhere in the view except on a selected object. To select a region in a view, use a selection box. This is an example of selecting a region. ═══ 33. Selecting a region ═══ To select a region in a view, use the region selection box. The region selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object. The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of each side. Using the mouse, you can do the following: o Create a selection box o Change the size of a selection box o Move a selection box. To remove the box at any time, click mouse button 1 while the mouse pointer is outside of the box. You can also use the keyboard to perform these actions. ═══ 34. Creating a selection box ═══ To create a selection box by dragging the mouse pointer, do the following: 1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region that you want to select. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. While holding down the mouse button, move the pointer to the opposite corner to create the box. Continue moving the mouse pointer until the box is the size you want. 3. Release the mouse button when the box is the correct size. To create a selection box without dragging the mouse pointer, do the following: 1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region you want to select. 2. Press mouse button 1. 3. Move the mouse pointer to the opposite corner of the region you want to select. 4. Hold down the Shift key, and press mouse button 1 to create the selection box. This is an example of creating a selection box. ═══ 35. Changing the size of a selection box ═══ You can change the selection box size by moving one or two sides of the box at a time. To move one side: 1. Move the mouse pointer to a square in the middle of a side of the box. The mouse pointer changes to a sizing pointer. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move that side of the box. To move two sides of the box at once: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two sides meet. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the two sides of the box at once. This is an example of changing the size of a selection box. ═══ 36. Moving a selection box ═══ To move a selection box, do the following: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the inside of the box. The mouse pointer changes to a move pointer . 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the box in any direction. 3. When the box is in the correct location, release the mouse button. This is an example of moving a selection box. ═══ 37. Using the keyboard to move the mouse pointer ═══ To use the keyboard to move the mouse pointer: 1. Press Shift+Esc to switch to the system icon. 2. Select Keyboard moves pointer from the pull-down menu. 3. Use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer. The following is a list of the mouse pointer movements and the keys used to make those movements: Movement Key Up Up arrow Down Down arrow Right Right arrow Left Left arrow To move the mouse pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any of the cursor movement keys. If Scroll Lock is on, the cursor movement keys scroll the window instead of moving the mouse pointer. ═══ 38. Using the keyboard to create a selection box ═══ To select a region in a view, use the region selection box. The region selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object. The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of each side. Using the keyboard, you can do the following: o Create a selection box o Change the size of a selection box o Move a selection box. To remove the box at any time, move the mouse pointer outside the selection box, and press the spacebar. This is a selection box that surrounds three nodes and two links. ═══ 39. Creating a selection box with the keyboard ═══ To create a selection box with the keyboard, select Keyboard moves pointer from the system icon menu. Then, do one of the following: o Press and hold down the Shift key, and then use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer to create the selection box. o Use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region you want to select, and press the spacebar. Move the mouse pointer to the opposite corner, press and hold down the Shift key, and press the spacebar to create a selection box. This is an example of creating a selection box. ═══ 40. Changing the size of a selection box with keyboard ═══ Using the keyboard, you can change the size of the selection box by moving one or two sides at a time. To move one side: 1. Place the mouse pointer on a square on one side of the box. 2. Press and hold down the Shift key. 3. Move the mouse pointer to change the size of the box. To move two sides of the box at once: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two sides meet. 2. Press and hold down the Shift key. 3. Move the mouse pointer to move the two sides of the box at once. This is an example of changing the size of a selection box. ═══ 41. Moving a selection box with keyboard ═══ To move the selection box with the keyboard, do the following: 1. Place the mouse pointer inside the box. The mouse pointer changes to a move pointer . 2. Press and hold down the Shift key. 3. Move the selection box to the new location. ═══ 42. Using the keyboard to select and deselect objects ═══ You can use the keyboard to select and deselect one or more objects. You can select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects. Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object To select a single object, use the cursor movement keys to move the pointer to the object, and press the spacebar. To deselect a single object, use the cursor movement keys to move the pointer to the selected object, and press the spacebar again. Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects To select a region in a view, use a selection box. To select more than one object, one at a time, use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the spacebar. Repeat this until you finish selecting all the objects you want to select. To deselect more than one object, one at a time, use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the spacebar to deselect each object. To deselect all the objects at one time, use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer anywhere in the view except on a selected object. Then press the spacebar to deselect the objects. ═══ 43. Scrolling using the keyboard ═══ You can use the keyboard to scroll one line at a time or one screen at a time. To scroll one line at a time, use the cursor movement keys. To scroll one screen at a time, use Page Up, Page Down, Ctrl+Page Up (left), or Ctrl+Page Down (right). If the Keyboard moves mouse pointer option is in effect, put Scroll Lock on (press the Scroll Lock key) to use the cursor movement keys to scroll. ═══ 44. Selecting options with keyboard ═══ To select an option from a pull-down menu, press the F10 key or the Alt key to access the action bar, and then do one of the following: o Type the underscored letter of the option that you want to select. o Press the cursor up key (), the cursor down key (), the cursor right key (), or the cursor left key () to highlight the option you want to select, and then press Enter. ═══ 45. Selecting a pushbutton with keyboard ═══ To select a pushbutton on a window, do one of the following: o Press the Ctrl key and the underscored letter of the pushbutton you want to select. o Tab to the pushbutton that you want to select, and then press Enter. ═══ 46. Using Accelerator Keys ═══ An accelerator key is a function key or a combination of keys that invokes an action. Accelerator keys for the LAN Network Manager functions are shown beside the choices on the pull-down menus. These accelerator keys can be used in navigating and manipulating the LAN Network Manager windows: F1 Displays general help for the window if no field is selected or contextual help if a field is selected. F10 Switches to or from the action bar. Cursor movement keys Move the cursor through the window. Tab key Moves the cursor through the fields on a window. Home On a pull-down menu, moves to the first item in the menu. On a window that allows data entry, moves the cursor to the first character in the data entry field. End On a pull-down menu, moves to the last item in the menu. On a window that allows data entry, moves the cursor to the last character in the data entry field. Esc On a pull-down menu or on a help window, closes that window. On a window that accepts data entry, activates the Cancel pushbutton. Page Up Scrolls the contents of a window up one page. Shift+F7 performs the same action. Page Down Scrolls the contents of a window down one page. Shift+F8 performs the same action. Underscored letter Selects a choice on the action bar or a pull-down menu. Alt+F4 Closes the current window and returns to the previous window. Alt+F5 Restores a window to its original size and location on the display screen. Alt+F6 Switches between a help window and a program window. Alt+F7 Allows you to move the window to a different location on the display, using the cursor movement keys. Alt+F8 Allows you to change the size of the window using the cursor movement keys. Alt+F9 Minimizes a window. Alt+F10 Maximizes a window. Alt+Esc Switches to the next program, including full-screen programs. Alt+Spacebar Switches to or from the system menu. Shift+Esc performs the same action. Ctrl+Esc Switches to the OS/2(T) task list. Ctrl+Underscored letter Selects a pushbutton on the current window. Shift+F7 Scrolls the contents of a window up one page. Page Up performs the same action. Shift+F8 Scrolls the contents of a window down one page. Page Down key performs the same action. Shift+F10 Displays help for help from within any help window. Shift+Esc Switches to or from the system menu. Alt+Spacebar performs the same action. ═══ 47. Help ═══ Select Help to use one of the following functions: Using help To display information about the types of help that are available for the LAN Network Manager program. General help To display information about the content of the window from which you requested help. Keys help To display a list of the accelerator keys and their functions. Help index To display an alphabetical list of the help information that is available for the LAN Network Manager program. Product Information To display copyright and version information for the LAN Network Manager program. Specific help information (contextual help) is also available for entry fields. ═══ 48. Using help ═══ To display information about the types of help that are available for the LAN Network Manager program, select Using help on the Help pull-down menu. The Using help option describes the different help facilities and explains how to use them. ═══ 49. General help ═══ To display information about the content of the window from which you requested help, select General help on the Help pull-down menu. The General help option provides general information about how the window functions in the LAN Network Manager program. This option also displays information that describes any fields and pushbuttons that are in the window. ═══ 50. Keys help ═══ To display a list of the accelerator keys and their functions, select Keys help on the Help pull-down menu. ═══ 51. Help index ═══ To display an alphabetical list of the help information that is available for the LAN Network Manager program, select Help index on the Help pull-down menu. To display help for a topic from the help index, use the scroll bar to move to the topic that you want to select, and then double-click mouse button 1. You can also select a topic with the cursor movement keys (, ) and then press Enter. ═══ 52. Product Information ═══ To display copyright and version information for the LAN Network Manager program, select Product Information on the Help pull-down menu. ═══ 53. Contextual help ═══ To display information about a specific entry field or item, place the cursor on the item and either select the Help pushbutton or press the F1 key. Contextual help explains the purpose of the item and provides information about the possible values for the item. You can access contextual help if your cursor is on any of the following items: o A choice on the action bar. o Any selection field, selection list, or entry field. These fields include selection fields in pull-down menus and in pop-up windows. o A message. If contextual help is not available for the item on which the cursor is located, the general help for the window is displayed. ═══ LAN Network Manager ═══ This is the LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 licensed program, part number 74F5538. The LAN Network Manager program operates under the Operating System/2 Version 1.3 and Operating System/2 Version 2.0 licensed programs. (C) Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1992. All rights reserved. ═══ 54. Keyboard moves mouse pointer ═══ To move the mouse pointer with the keyboard, click on the system icon (located in the left-hand corner of the title bar of a view) and then select Keyboard moves pointer on the pull-down menu. A check mark is displayed next to the option to indicate that it is in effect. This option remains in effect until you turn it off. To turn this option off, place the mouse pointer on the option, and click mouse button 1. Because the mouse pointer movement keys usually move the scroll bars in the view, if you select this option and want to use the arrow keys to move the scroll bar, press the Scroll Lock key. If you want to use the keyboard for mouse pointer movement for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. ═══ 55. Hide frame controls ═══ To hide all frame controls for the window, select Hide frame controls, on the pull-down menu for the system icon (located in the left-hand corner of the title bar of a view). Frame controls are: o The action bar o The minimize and maximize arrows at the right corner of the title bar of the window o The title bar o The scroll bars. Hide frame controls does not hide the system icon. Hide frame controls remains in effect until you close the view or until you turn the option off by selecting it again. If you want these controls hidden for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key, and reselect the option. ═══ 56. Hide scroll bars ═══ To hide the scroll bars for this window, select Hide scroll bars, on the system menu located in the title bar of a view. Hide scroll bars remains in effect for all future occurrences of this view until you turn it off. To turn this option off, reselect it. If you want scroll bars hidden for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key, and reselect the option. ═══ 57. Main window ═══ You can access help for the following views of your local area network (LAN): Network level view This level displays the entire LAN, including all the segments and the bridges that connect them. Segment level view This level displays an entire segment, including the devices that are directly attached to the segment. CAU level view This level displays an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and its attached devices. ═══ 58. Status of alerts ═══ The Alert status area displays the word Alert if a new alert has been logged since you last viewed the event log. The alert message remains in the window until you open the event log. You can open the event log by double-clicking on the alert message. ═══ 59. View Overview ═══ The LAN Network Manager program displays status and configuration information about your local area network (LAN) in a view. You can monitor network activity at the following levels: Network level Displays a high-level representation of the segments and bridges of your network. Segment level Displays a representation of the stations and resources on a selected segment. CAU level Displays a representation of the stations and resources attached to a selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). The color of a node or link indicates its status. Any change in the color of a node indicates a corresponding change in status. If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the fill pattern changes to solid. If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to that bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the link changes to a solid line. The first time you start the LAN Network Manager program, the view displays only the local segment. When you define bridges, these bridges are not immediately represented in the view, but you can link them in the Bridges window The first time you link a bridge, the LAN Network Manager program updates the view and displays the bridge as a link connecting the nodes at each end of the bridge. The LAN Network Manager program maintains the bridge's position in the view each subsequent time that you start the program, although the status of the bridge is represented as Unknown until you link it. ═══ 60. Status description ═══ The LAN Network Manager program indicates the status of a node or link by its color. If the status of a node changes, the color of the node also changes to indicate the new status. The LAN Network Manager program associates the colors it uses in a view with the following status categories: Non selectable There is only a logical connection between resources, not a physical link that can be selected and managed. Normal The node or link is functioning properly. Severity 1 The node or link is not responding. Manual intervention is required to restore normal operation. Severity 2 The performance of the node or link is degraded. Inactive The node is defined to the LAN Network Manager program, but the logical connection is closed. Unknown The LAN Network Manager program is unable to determine the status of the node or link. Downstream error The node is operational, but one or more of the node's downstream resources is in Severity status. You can use the default colors set by the LAN Network Manager program, or you can set the colors associated with these statuses yourself. To change the colors, select Color on the Legend pull-down menu. For a table that lists the categories of problem severity and the LAN Network Manager errors that are associated with them, see Using LAN Network Manager. ═══ 61. Network Level View ═══ The network level view is the main window of the LAN Network Manager program. This window displays a graphical representation of the segments and bridges that make up your local area network (LAN). Segments are represented by nodes, and bridges are represented by links. The color of a resource indicates its status. Any change in the color of a resource indicates a corresponding change in status. If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the pattern changes to solid. If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to that bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the link changes to a solid line. Double-clicking on a node or a link is a quick way to access the Information/Status window for that segment or bridge. You can also open a view of a segment from the network level view. Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the symbol shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window. The status area, at the bottom of the window, displays the following information from left to right: o The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter and the local segment. o The status of the host connection. o The status of alerts that have been logged since you last displayed the event log. o The status of the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 62. Opening a segment level view ═══ From the network level view, there are two ways to generate a view of a segment: o Select the segment in the view, and then select Segment level or Segment level-hide CAU from the View pull-down menu. If you select Segment level, the view displays all stations and IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) attached directly to the segment. Each CAU is represented by a node, and the stations that are attached to the segment through the CAU are not displayed. The CAU level view is available by double-clicking on the CAU and selecting the View pushbutton. If you select Segment level-hide CAU, the view displays all stations on that segment, whether or not the stations are attached to the segment through a CAU. The CAU itself is not represented as a node, but the CAU adapters are displayed, in addition to the stations that are attached to the segment through the CAU. The CAU level view is not available from this view. o Double-click on the segment. The Segment Information/Status window is displayed. Select the View pushbutton. The view that is displayed does not hide CAUs. ═══ 63. Status of the Network ═══ The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter, of the current segment, or of the viewed IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) varies, depending on whether the resource is connected to an IBM Token-Ring Network or an IBM PC Network. ═══ 64. Possible Statuses for the IBM Token-Ring Network ═══ When the LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to an IBM(T) Token-Ring Network, one of the following statuses appears in the status area. If the status is anything other than normal, soft error, or wrapped, the LAN Network Manager options that involve communications on the LAN might be disrupted. Normal The LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to the network, and there are no problems. This status can also appear if a fault that occurs on the ring causes the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to remove the source of the fault from the ring. Soft error An intermittent error on the network is causing data to be retransmitted. Wrapped The Token-Ring segment is now using the backup path. Beaconing An adapter has sent a frame that indicates a serious ring problem, such as a broken cable. Data lost The LAN Network Manager program cannot receive incoming frames, log errors, log bridge-performance counter reports, or process and log configuration changes as fast as they occur. Some information, including error information and error recovery information, will be lost. Until the message disappears, the LAN Network Manager program stops receiving data. To recover from this state, do one or more of the following: o Increase the database-resynchronization timer and the age-out timer. o Reduce the number of bridges that are sending bridge-performance notifications or increase the bridge-performance notification interval for several bridges. o Turn soft-error reporting off. This is a temporary condition. Adapter closed The LAN Network Manager adapter has closed. Wire fault There is a break or a short in a segment of the LAN Network Manager adapter's cable. Initializing The LAN Network Manager program is initializing. This status occurs at startup and indicates that the LAN Network Manager adapter is being opened. ═══ 65. Possible Statuses for the IBM PC Network ═══ When the LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to an IBM(T) PC Network(T), one of the following statuses appears in the status area. If the status is anything other than normal, the LAN Network Manager options that involve communications on the LAN might be disrupted. Normal There are no problems on the network. No carrier A carrier signal is not being broadcast on a given frequency. In the absence of such a carrier, no information can be modulated on that frequency. Continuous carrier A carrier signal is being constantly broadcast on a given frequency. No further information can be modulated on that frequency. Data lost The LAN Network Manager program cannot receive incoming frames, log errors, log bridge-performance counter reports, or process and log configuration changes as fast as they occur. Some information, including error information and error recovery information, will be lost. Until the message disappears, the LAN Network Manager program stops receiving data. To recover from this state, do one or more of the following: o Increase the database-resynchronization timer and the age-out timer o Reduce the number of bridges that send bridge-performance notifications or increase the bridge-performance notification interval for several bridges. This is a temporary condition. Adapter closed The adapter has closed. Initializing The LAN Network Manager program is initializing. This status occurs at startup and indicates that the LAN Network Manager adapter is being opened. ═══ 66. Status of the Host Connection ═══ This section of the status area in the main window of the LAN Network Manager program indicates the status of the host connection the last time the LAN Network Manager program attempted to send an alert to the NetView(T) host or a command was received from the NetView host. If the host link has gone down since communication was last established, the host status continues to indicate that the host link is up until another alert is sent. The status of the host connection can be: o Host link up o Running host command o Host link down If you have not configured a host connection, the status area displays Host link down. ═══ 67. Status of the LAN Network Manager program ═══ This section of the status area in the main window of the LAN Network Manager program indicates the status of the program. Possible status messages for the program include: o Starting LNM o Restarting LNM o Opening network view o Opening segment view o Opening CAU view o Refreshing configuration o Creating view o Recreating view o Saving view. If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status change. To update the view with this new configuration information, select Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu. ═══ 68. Segment Level View ═══ The segment level view provides an expanded view of a particular LAN segment. This window displays a graphical representation of the stations that are attached to the selected segment, including their statuses. These stations can represent workstation adapters, IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), and bridges. The other segments to which the bridges are connected are also represented in the view. If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level from the View pull-down menu, the view displays all the stations and CAUs that are attached directly to the segment. Each CAU is represented by a node, and the stations that are attached to the segment through the CAU are not displayed. If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU from the View pull-down menu, the view displays all the stations that are on that segment, whether or not the stations are attached to the segment through a CAU. The CAU itself is not represented as a node, but the CAU adapters are displayed, in addition to the stations that are attached to the segment through the CAU. Double-clicking on a node or a link is a quick way to access the Information/Status window for that station or bridge. You can also open a view of a CAU from the segment level view. The color of a resource indicates the status of the adapter installed in that resource. Any change in the color of a resource indicates a corresponding change in status. If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the fill pattern changes to solid. Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the symbol shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window. The status area, at the bottom of the window, indicates: o The status of the viewed segment. This information appears on the left and varies, depending on whether the segment is a Token-Ring segment or a PC Network segment. o The status of the LAN Network Manager program, indicating that the program is refreshing the configuration information for the stations, for example. This information appears on the right. The greyed lines that connect the resources in the view represent only the logical relationships between the resources. They are not links and do not provide any status information. These lines cannot be selected. ═══ 69. Opening a CAU level view ═══ From the segment level view, there are two ways to generate a view of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU): o Select the CAU, and then select CAU level on the View pull-down menu. o Double-click on the CAU. The CAU Information/Status window is displayed. Select the View pushbutton. If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU on the View pull-down menu, you cannot select a CAU. In this case, do one of the following before trying to generate a CAU level view: o Close the view and reopen it by selecting Segment level on the View pull-down menu. o Use the Find function to locate the CAU. ═══ 70. CAU Level View ═══ The CAU level view displays a graphical representation of an IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs) that are connected to it. Up to four LAMs can be connected to a CAU. The view also displays the stations that are attached to the LAM ports. To view status information for an object, double-click on the object. Depending on the object selected, one of the following appears: o Station Information/Status window o Segment Information/Status window o Bridge Information/Status window o CAU Information/Status window (if you double-click on the top of the CAU) o CAU Module Details window (if you double-click on a LAM). When the CAU Level View window is displayed, the LAMs are positioned in the window according to the port number to which they are attached on the CAU. These port numbers are displayed to the left of each LAM. If you have LAMs attached to port numbers 1 and 4, the window displays the CAU at the top, then a LAM, then 2 blank spaces, then another LAM. If you change the physical arrangement of your LAMs, you can also move the LAMs in the view to reflect this new arrangement. If a station is attached to a lobe and the lobe is disabled, a circle with a slash through it appears over the lobe receptacle. If the lobe receptacle is not in use but is disabled, an X appears over the lobe receptacle. The color of a resource reflects its status. Any change in the color of a resource indicates a corresponding change in status. If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the pattern changes to solid. If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to that link has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display the event log, the link changes to a solid line. Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the default shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window. ═══ Moving a LAM ═══ If you change the physical arrangement of your Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs), you can also move the LAMs in the view to correspond to this new arrangement. To move a LAM to another position, do the following: 1. Select the LAM you want to move by pressing mouse button 2. 2. Select the new position of the LAM by pressing mouse button 2. If the selected position currently contains a LAM, the LAN Network Manager program displays a message to confirm that you want to swap these two LAMs. If the selected position is currently empty, the LAN Network Manager program displays a message to confirm that you want to move the LAM. You can also move a LAM by doing the following: 1. Select the LAM you want to move by pressing mouse button 2. 2. While holding the mouse button down, move the mouse pointer to the new position of the LAM. 3. Release mouse button 2. If the selected position currently contains a LAM, the LAN Network Manager program displays a message to confirm that you want to swap these two LAMs. If the selected position is currently empty, the LAN Network Manager program displays a message to confirm that you want to move the LAM. ═══ 71. Print ═══ To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select Print, on the File pull-down menu. When you select Print, the Print Device Level View window is displayed. In this window, you can specify print options and the print destination. While you are printing, the Print pull-down choice changes to Stop printing. You can stop the print by selecting Stop printing. ═══ Print Device Level View ═══ To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select Print, on the File pull-down menu. This window contains the following field: Destination A scrollable list of the possible print destinations. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Print To close the window and print the view. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Printer setup To specify more print options, such as the type of form to use, the print quality, and form-feed control. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 72. Select object types ═══ To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types, on the Edit pull-down menu. The Select Items window appears. You can select one or more of the following types of objects: o Lobes o Segments o Bridges o Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs) o Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then deselect the objects you do not want selected. ═══ 73. Select Items ═══ To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types, on the Edit pull-down menu. In this window, select one or more of the following: o Lobes o Segments o Bridges o Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs) o Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then deselect the objects you do not want selected. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Select To close this window and cause the specified object types to be selected. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Lobes ═══ To select all the lodes in the view, select Lobes, on the Select Items window. ═══ Segments ═══ To select all the segments in the view, select Segments, on the Select Items window. ═══ Segments ═══ To select all the bridges in the view, select Bridges, on the Select Items window. ═══ LAMs ═══ To select all the Lobe Attachment Modules in the view, select LAMs, on the Select Items window. ═══ CAU ═══ To select the IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the view, select CAU, on the Select Items window. ═══ Display labels ═══ To specify the labels to display on the CAU level view, select Display labels, on the View pull-down menu. When you select Display labels, the Display Labels window is displayed. Select the types of labels you want to display on the current CAU level view. If you deselect a label, you hide the label in the view. ═══ 74. Display Labels ═══ Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide on the CAU level view. Selecting an item displays it; deselecting it hides it. You can select one or more of the following labels: LAM numbers To display the number associated with each Lobe Attachment Module. Segment numbers To display the 3-digit number associated with each segment. Bridge numbers To display the 1-digit number that is specified in the bridge program. This number is often used to differentiate between two parallel bridges that connect the same segments. Bridge names To display the user-defined names of the bridges that are attached to the IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU). The bridge name is specified on the Bridge definition window. Warning: If you are displaying a CAU with many bridges, displaying labels might clutter the screen and make it hard to read. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To display the selected labels. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 75. System ═══ Select System to use one of the following functions: System parameters To display or change the system parameters. Secure system To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access. Restart To stop the LAN Network Manager program and start it again. Exit To stop the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ System Parameters ═══ To display information about the LAN Network Manager adapter, select System parameters, on the System pull-down menu. The System Parameters window appears. ═══ 76. System Parameters ═══ To display information about the LAN Network Manager adapter, select System parameters, on the System pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The 12-digit hexadecimal address and the symbolic name (1-16 characters), if one is defined, that identifies the adapter. LAN segment number The 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies the LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. LAN type The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. The LAN type can be either Token-Ring Network or PC Network(T). Group address The address that represents the group of logically related adapters to which the adapter belongs. An application can send a single message to a group address, and all adapters with that group address receive the message. Functional addresses A hexadecimal group address representing all the functional addresses available in the adapter. An adapter can have up to 31 functional addresses. A list box contains the names of the functions associated with the adapter, such as active monitor, LAN error monitor, or configuration report server. Scroll through the list to view the functions in the list box. Microcode level of adapter The microcode level of the adapter. LAN Network Manager level The version of the LAN Network Manager program that is running. Current adapter Whether the adapter is a primary or alternate adapter. A primary adapter uses standard (default) mapping between adapter shared RAM, adapter ROM, and designated memory segments. The primary adapter is usually designated as adapter 0 on the LAN Profile Configuration menu of the OS/2(T) Communications Manager program. An alternate adapter uses alternate (not standard or default) mapping between adapter shared RAM, adapter ROM, and designated memory segments. The alternate adapter is usually designated as adapter 1 on the LAN Profile Configuration menu of the OS/2 Communications Manager program. Current reporting link Whether the reporting link is controlling or observing. A network can have more than one controlling LAN Network Manager program if the controlling LAN Network Manager programs do not attempt to establish links with the same bridges. Each bridge can have up to 4 reporting links (0-3). Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program can perform the following tasks: o Remove stations from a local or remote LAN segments o Set soft-error reporting options for remote segments o Change the bridge configuration parameters o Remove unauthorized trace tools. If the LAN Network Manager program is controlling, the reporting link can change bridge-configuration parameters and disable or enable bridge functions. Reporting link 0 is a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Reporting links 1-3 are observing LAN Network Manager programs. Current host connection The type of host connection: o None (if there is no host connection) o OS/2 o NetView/PC(T). Comments The comments that have been entered on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the system parameters. ═══ System Parameters Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the System Parameters window, to use the following functions: Adapter parameters To change adapter information, such as the number of data link control (DLC) links and the adapter used for the next startup of the LAN Network Manager program. Bridge parameters To change the bridge parameters, such as the automatic bridge link and the reporting link status. Host parameters To specify the type of host connection to be used for the next startup of the LAN Network Manager program. Miscellaneous parameters To change the following parameters: LAN name, response time-out, tracing authorization, adapter monitoring, automatic retry on beaconing, adapter monitoring, configuration monitor, and maximum events in event log. Access control parameters To change the parameters that are associated with adapter access on the network and with LAN asset management that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs). Alert Filters To define or delete alert filters or to set user filters for alerts that are sent to the host. Security Parameters To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN Network Manager program. LAN Station Manager options To specify what type of LAN Station Manager information, if any, to save in the LAN Network Manager database. LNM user interface options To specify the user interface to use the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started. ═══ Adapter parameters ═══ To change information for the LAN Network Manager adapter, select Adapter parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. For example, you can specify the number of data link control (DLC) links that are required by the LAN Network Manager program, or you can select which adapter to use the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started. The Adapter Parameters window appears. ═══ 77. Adapter Parameters ═══ To display or change the parameters of the LAN Network Manager adapter, select Adapter parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The LAN Network Manager adapter's hexadecimal address and user-defined name (if one is defined). Universal address The LAN Network Manager adapter's universally administered address, which is permanently encoded in the adapter at the time of manufacture. NAUN address/name The adapter address of the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) and the user-defined adapter name of the nearest active upstream neighbor (if one is defined. This applies to a Token-Ring Network only. DLC link stations obtained at startup The number of data link control (DLC) link stations that were obtained when the adapter was opened during startup of the LAN Network Manager program. DLC link stations for next startup or restart The number of data link control link stations that the LAN Network Manager program should attempt to obtain at the next startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program. Adapter used current Whether the LAN Network Manager program is currently using the primary or alternate adapter. Adapter used for next startup or restart Whether the LAN Network Manager program should use the primary or alternate adapter the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ DLC link stations for next startup or restart ═══ Specify how many data link control (DLC) link stations (0-255) are to be requested when you start or restart the LAN Network Manager program. LAN Network Manager requires one link station for each bridge link. The total required by the LAN Network Manager program is no less than the number of bridges that will be defined as automatically linked. However, this number cannot exceed 255. The default is 2. The number of link stations that are defined for the adapter in the OS/2 Communications Manager limits the number of link stations that are available to the LAN Network Manager program. The number that is defined in the Communications Manager program accommodates all applications in the workstation that use the adapter, such as the LAN Network Manager program, Remote Data Services, NETBIOS, and Host Communications through a network adapter. If another application requests link stations before the LAN Network Manager program does, LAN Network Manager might not be able to obtain the number of link stations that you defined in the Adapter Parameters window. To enable the LAN Network Manager program to obtain the link stations that it needs, do one or more of the following: o Increase the maximum number of link stations for the adapter (in the LAN feature profiles of Communications Manager for OS/2 Version 1.3 or in the LAN Adapter and Protocol Support of Communications Manager for OS/2 Version 2.0). o Reconfigure the other applications to use fewer link stations. o Shut down the other applications. For example, assume that the maximum number of link stations that are defined for the adapter (in the LAN feature profiles of Communications Manager) is 200. Then assume that the number of DLC link stations for next startup or restart is 200 and that the LAN Network Manager program is running on the same workstation as a LAN server that requires 32 link stations. If you start the LAN Network Manager program before you start the LAN server, the LAN Network Manager program uses all the link stations, and the LAN server will not be able to start. If you start the LAN server first, the LAN Network Manager program can start, but it will not be able to link to more than 168 bridges. ═══ Adapter used for next startup or restart ═══ Specify which adapter (primary or alternate) the LAN Network Manager program is to use at next startup or restart. The primary adapter is usually designated as adapter 0 on the LAN Profile Configuration menu in the OS/2 Communications Manager. The alternate adapter is usually designated as adapter 1. ═══ Bridge parameters ═══ To change the parameters associated with bridge operation, select Bridge parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. For example, you can specify parameters such as the automatic bridge link and the reporting link status. The Bridge Parameters window appears. ═══ 78. Bridge Parameters ═══ To display the parameters that pertain to the bridges within the managed domain, select Bridge parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following fields: Automatic bridge link Whether the automatic bridge link is active or inactive. Auto-link time interval The time, in minutes, that the LAN Network Manager program should wait between attempts to link to bridges that are defined to be automatically linked. Reporting link status current Whether the LAN Network Manager program is currently defined as controlling or observing. Reporting link status for next startup or restart Which reporting link the LAN Network Manager program should use the next time it is started or restarted. Password The password for the selected reporting link. Records in Bridge Performance Table per bridge; current maximum The current maximum number of records per bridge in the bridge-performance table. Records in Bridge Performance Table per bridge; maximum for next startup or restart The maximum number of records per bridge in the bridge performance table for the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Automatic bridge link ═══ Specify whether to activate the automatic bridge link, which causes the LAN Network Manager program to attempt to maintain a communication link with any defined bridge with Automatic bridge link set to Yes. The LAN Network Manager program tries to re-establish a link at the interval you specify. Select Inactive if you do not want the LAN Network Manager program to try to re-establish a link when communication with a bridge is lost, regardless of the bridge's Automatic bridge link setting. You can also set the link to Inactive to isolate a particular ring for problem determination. This prevents the bridges from automatically relinking. ═══ Auto-link time interval ═══ Specify the number of minutes (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program is to wait between attempts to link defined bridges with Automatic bridge link set to Yes. The default is 4 minutes. ═══ Reporting link status for next startup or restart ═══ Specify the reporting link to use for the next startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program. Select one of the following: o Controlling (the default) o Observing 1 o Observing 2 o Observing 3. A controlling reporting link authorizes the LAN Network Manager program to change bridge-configuration parameters and to disable and enable bridge functions. An observing reporting link authorizes the LAN Network Manager program to perform all network management functions except those restricted to the controlling link. The restricted functions include: o Removing adapters from a ring o Changing certain bridge configuration parameters, such as those affecting frame forwarding, single-route broadcast, and enabled functional addresses. o Enabling or disabling certain bridge functions o Sending registration requests to Controlled Access Units (CAUs). ═══ Reporting link status password ═══ Specify the password of the selected reporting link. The password must match the bridge's password for this reporting link. If the passwords do not match, the LAN Network Manager program cannot link to any bridges. The initial reporting link password for the LAN Network Manager program and for the bridge is 00000000. ═══ Maximum records for next startup or restart ═══ Specify the maximum number of records (1-9999) per bridge to maintain in the bridge-performance table at the next startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program. If the maximum is exceeded, the LAN Network Manager program writes the next entry over the oldest record for that bridge. The maximum number of entries in the bridge performance table is equal to the maximum number of records per bridge multiplied by the maximum number of bridges that have been linked with performance notification turned on. Use the CHKDSK command to ensure that you have adequate disk space before setting this number to a very large value or requesting performance notifications from a large number of bridges. Requesting a large reduction in the number of records per bridge can cause a temporary delay, during which the OS/2 Database Manager reorganizes the database to reflect the new value. ═══ Host parameters ═══ To specify the host connection (if any) to use for the next startup of the LAN Network Manager program, select Host parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The Host Parameters window appears. ═══ 79. Host Parameters ═══ To change the host connection for the next startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program, select Host parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following fields: Current host connection The type of host connection, if any, that is currently defined. Current service point name The service point name, if OS/2(T) is currently defined as the type of host connection. Host connection for next startup or restart The type of host connection to establish the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. OS/2 service point name The service point name used by the NetView(T) program, if OS/2 is defined as the host connection for the next startup or restart. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Host connection ═══ Specify the type of host connection for the next startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program. You can specify one of the following: o None o OS/2 If you select an OS/2 connection, enter a name in the OS/2 service point name field. o NetView/PC. ═══ Service point name ═══ If you select an OS/2 host connection on the Host Parameters window, enter a service point name. This name is the physical unit (PU) name assigned in the VTAM major node for this OS/2 station to communicate with the NetView host. It should be defined as the PU in the SNA Base Profile configuration of the OS/2 Communications Manager. The service-point name can be 1-8 characters, in any combination of the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $, and %. You can type letters in lowercase, but the LAN Network Manager program converts all lowercase entries to uppercase. ═══ Miscellaneous parameters ═══ To change other parameters associated with the operation of the LAN Network Manager program, select Miscellaneous parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. For example, you can change parameters such as response time-out, tracing authorization, adapter monitoring, automatic retry on beaconing, and the maximum number of events in the event log. The Miscellaneous Parameters window appears. ═══ 80. Miscellaneous Parameters ═══ To define miscellaneous parameters for the LAN Network Manager program, select Miscellaneous parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following fields: LAN name The name of the local LAN segment. Response timeout (ss) The time, in seconds, that the LAN Network Manager program waits for a response before timing out when communicating with an adapter or device on a remote LAN segment. Tracing authorization The adapters that are authorized for tracing. Auto retry on beaconing Whether the adapter automatically attempts to reopen when the ring is beaconing. Retry interval The interval, in minutes, at which the adapter attempts to reopen when the ring is beaconing. Number of retries The maximum number of times that the adapter attempts to reopen when the ring is beaconing. Adapter monitoring Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors those adapters that are defined to be monitored. Retries before monitor alert The maximum number of times that the LAN Network Manager program sends a test frame to a station without receiving a response before generating an alert. Configuration monitor age-out The time, in days, that the LAN Network Manager program allows an inactive adapter to remain in the database. Configuration monitor resync The time, in hours and minutes, that the LAN Network Manager program waits between resynchronizations. Current maximum events in event log The maximum number of events that can currently be maintained in the event log. Maximum events in event log for next startup or restart The maximum number of events that can be maintained in the event log the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. Comments Your comments about the LAN Network Manager adapter. The comments are displayed on the System parameters window. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ LAN name ═══ Specify the name of the LAN for which the parameters are displayed. This name can be sent to the NetView host as a resource name and used as a resource name in alert details. The name you specify is effective when you select the Set pushbutton. The LAN name can be 1-8 characters in any combination of the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, $, %, and #. ═══ Response timeout ═══ Specify the number of seconds (6-99) that the LAN Network Manager program waits to receive a response from an adapter on a remote LAN segment before timing out. The default is 6 seconds. In the case of bridge adapters, if the first adapter in the bridge definition is on the remote segment, the LAN Network Manager program makes up to four attempts to communicate with the bridge. First, the program sends a frame to the adapter on the remote segment. If it does not receive a response within the specified time period, the program sends another frame. If it still receives no response within the specified time period, the LAN Network Manager program attempts to communicate with the adapter on the local segment. If it receives no response within the specified time period, the program sends another frame. If it still receives no response within the specified time period, the LAN Network Manager program generates an alert. Given this, it could take up to 4 times the number of seconds that you specify in the Response timeout field before the LAN Network Manager program generates an alert. ═══ Tracing authorization ═══ Specify which adapters are allowed to trace on the network, for that portion of the network that the LAN Network Manager program controls, by selecting one of the following: All To allow all adapters to trace. This is the default. None To not allow any adapter to trace, even if an adapter is defined as authorized to trace. The LAN Network Manager program removes adapters that attempt to trace. Stations defined to trace To allow only the adapters defined as authorized to trace to do so. The LAN Network Manager program removes adapters that attempt to trace if they are not defined to do so. Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program can authorize tracing for the portion of the network that it controls. The LAN Network Manager program recognizes only IBM Token-Ring Network trace and performance adapters (or compatible adapters) as trace adapters. ═══ Auto retry on beaconing ═══ Specify whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically tries to reinsert onto the ring when it detects a beaconing condition during initialization. ═══ Retry interval ═══ Specify the number of minutes (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program waits before trying to insert onto the ring after it detects a beaconing condition. The default is 1 minute. ═══ Number of retries ═══ Specify the maximum number of times (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program tries to open its adapter on a beaconing ring before completing initialization. If the maximum number is exceeded, the LAN Network Manager program completes initialization and runs with a limited set of functions on the beaconing ring. The default is 3 times. ═══ Adapter monitoring ═══ Specify whether to activate adapter monitoring. The default is Active. You can monitor any adapter within the managed domain that responds to test frames sent to the null service access point (SAP) of the the logical link control (LLC) sublayer. When the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted, it polls each adapter that is defined to be monitored. The first time an adapter responds, the LAN Network Manager program logs an event that indicates that the adapter is responding. If an adapter does not respond, the LAN Network Manager program continues to poll the adapter until it reaches the number of retries specified on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. If the adapter still does not respond, the LAN Network Manager program logs an alert to indicate that the adapter is not responding. If the adapter responds as expected during polling, no action is taken. ═══ Retries before monitor alert ═══ Specify the number of consecutive times (4-99) that the LAN Network Manager program sends a test frame to a station without receiving a response before it generates an alert. If adapter monitoring is set to Inactive, the LAN Network Manager program ignores this value. The default is 4 times. ═══ Configuration monitor age-out ═══ Specify the number of days (7-999) that an adapter can remain inactive. The LAN Network Manager program periodically checks for any adapters that have been inactive for longer than the time you specify as the age-out time interval. Any such adapters are deleted from the database-configuration table. The default is 90 days. If you enter a short interval in this field, the database-configuration table is verified more often. If you enter a long interval, too many records might accumulate in the database for unused adapters. If an adapter is moved from one segment to another, the adapter remains in the database as being on both segments, until the age-out time interval expires for the previous segment. ═══ Configuration monitor resync ═══ Specify the number of hours and minutes (00:01-99:59) that pass before the LAN Network Manager program resynchronizes the segment. Resynchronization enables the LAN Network Manager program to maintain an accurate network configuration by querying each adapter or bridge and updating the database tables with current information. The default is 01:00 (1 hour). The resynchronization process can be time-consuming for a large network. Performance degrades if you specify a frequent interval. The IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program, Version 1.1, does not support all the subvectors that are transmitted by the LAN Network Manager program when it resynchronizes the segment. If an adapter that uses the universal-address subvectors is on a segment linked by a bridge that uses Version 1.1 of the bridge program, the resynchronization process ends when that adapter is reached, and the configuration information for that segment will be incomplete. ═══ Maximum events in event log ═══ Specify the maximum number of events (1-2000) that the LAN Network Manager program writes to the event log before it writes over the oldest entry in the log. The default is 200 events. This value takes effect the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. Requesting a large reduction in the number of events in the event log can cause a temporary delay, during which the OS/2 Database Manager reorganizes the database to reflect the new value. To reduce the number of events that the LAN Network Manager program writes to the event log, you can filter events as the program receives them. ═══ Comments ═══ Specify any comments about the LAN Network Manager adapter. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field. Read the LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility. Comments that you enter in this window appear on the System Parameters window. ═══ Access control parameters ═══ To change the parameters that are associated with adapter access on the network and with LAN asset management that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), select Access control parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The Access Control Parameters window appears. ═══ 81. Access Control Parameters ═══ To change the parameters that are associated with adapter access on the network and with LAN asset management that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), select Access control parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following fields: Access control Whether access control is active. Adapter address is unauthorized Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if an adapter with an unauthorized address enters the LAN. Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if an adapter either enters the network during an unauthorized day or time or is on the network during an unauthorized day or time. Adapter has moved Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if an adapter that is attached to a CAU moves. Adapter is in an undefined bridge Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if an undefined bridge enters the LAN. Disable the lobe Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program disable the lobe to which the adapter is attached if any of the conditions selected above are encountered. Controlled Access Unit password The password for the CAU. Only a LAN Network Manager program with a valid password can register with and perform actions on a CAU. A LAN Network Manager program that is not registered can only display information about the CAU. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Access control ═══ Specify whether access control is Active or Inactive. When access control is inactive and an adapter enters the network, the LAN Network Manager program records information about that adapter in the database, whether the adapter is defined or not. In this case, the LAN Network Manager program considers all adapters to be authorized to access the network. When access control is active, however, the LAN Network Manager program verifies that the address of the new adapter is in the database. Adapter addresses that are not in the database are unauthorized. If the LAN Network Manager program detects an unauthorized adapter, it generates an alert. Depending on the parameters that you set in the Access Control Parameters window, the program can also automatically attempt to remove the adapter in the following cases: o An adapter with an unauthorized address enters the network. o An adapter enters the network during an unauthorized day or time. o An adapter enters the network at an unauthorized location. o An undefined bridge enters the network. Define all bridge adapters and adapters of critical resources before you activate access control. If you do not, the LAN Network Manager program might remove an adapter that you need. For example, suppose you activate access control, and then link to a bridge without first configuring the bridge adapters. If the near adapter is on the local segment, it is authorized. However, the LAN Network Manager program considers the far adapter unauthorized. Therefore, the far adapter is removed. If the adapter is removed, the link to the bridge is lost. The LAN Network Manager program can no longer manage the remote segment. If neither adapter is on a managed segment, then both adapters are removed. To authorize a station adapter, you can add the adapter's address to the database by using the Add station function to add a definition or by deactivating access control and allowing or forcing the LAN Network Manager program to resynchronize the ring containing the adapter. To authorize the adapters of a bridge, add both adapter addresses to the database by using the Add bridge function to define the bridge. ═══ Adapter address is unauthorized ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter with an adapter address that is not listed in the LAN Network Manager database, select Adapter address is unauthorized, on the Access Control Parameters window. An adapter is not authorized if its address is not in the configuration table or station-definition table. To authorize an adapter, you can add the adapter's address to the database by using the Add station function to add a definition or by deactivating access control and allowing or forcing the LAN Network Manager program to resynchronize the ring containing the adapter. ═══ Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that enters the network at an unauthorized time or on an unauthorized day of the week, select Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time, on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Adapter has moved ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that enters the network in an unauthorized location, select Adapter has moved, on the Access Control Parameters window. This field is valid only for adapters that are attached to an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). ═══ Adapter is in an undefined bridge ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that does not have an address listed in the bridge-definition table, select Adapter is in an undefined bridge, on the Access Control Parameters window. A bridge is considered to be an unauthorized (undefined) bridge if an adapter's functional address identifies it as a bridge adapter but the adapter address is not listed in the bridge-definition table. ═══ Disable the lobe ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program disable the lobe of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to which the adapter causing the access violation is attached, select Disable lobe, on the Access Control Parameters window. If the unauthorized adapter is not on a CAU and you select this option, the adapter is removed with a force-remove command. If you do not select this option, a force-remove frame is used to remove unauthorized adapters that try to enter the network. Nothing prevents the adapter from reinserting itself into the ring. If you have not selected any conditions for adapter removal, this field is ignored. If you select this option, enter a valid password in the Controlled Access Unit password field. ═══ Controlled Access Unit password ═══ If you have selected Disable the lobe, on the Access Control Parameters window, enter the password that the LAN Network Manager program sends to the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program with a valid password can register with and perform actions on a CAU. The password must be 1-8 characters with no blanks. ═══ Alert filters ═══ To define or delete alert filters or to set user filters for alerts that are sent to the host, select Alert filters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. You can also change the name and status of a filter that is defined in a dynamic link library (DLL). The Alert Filters window appears. ═══ 82. Alert Filters ═══ To define, change, or delete filters for alerts that are sent to the host, select Alert filters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The alert filters are listed in the order in which they are processed, not in the order in which they are defined. If a user-defined filter is currently active, the status, dynamic link library (DLL) name, and routine name of the filter are displayed. This window contains the following fields: Block/Pass Whether the specified alert is blocked (Block) or passed (Pass) to the host. Alert ID The identifier assigned to the alert by the resource that sent it. The alert ID is not equivalent to the message number used by the LAN Network Manager program. See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a complete list of alerts that the LAN Network Manager program generates from the alert IDs. Resource name The resource that reports the alert. Alert type The type and severity of the alert. User defined filter The name of the current user-filter program that is active, if you specify one. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the alert filters. ═══ Alert Filters Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Alert Filters window, to use the following functions: Add filter To define a filter, based on alert action, alert selection criteria, and resource name. Change filter To change whether the alert that is defined by the filter is passed or blocked. Delete filter To delete a filter that you defined. Set user filter To specify the name of a dynamic link library (DLL) and the routine used in the DLL. ═══ Add or Change filter ═══ To add a filter or to change the definition of an existing filter, select Add filter or Change filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. If you select a filter first, the Actions pull-down menu shows Change filter as the option. If you do not select a filter, the Actions pull-down menu shows Add filter as the option. If you change a filter definition, the only parameter you can change is the alert action. The Define Filter window appears. ═══ 83. Define Filter ═══ To define a new alert filter, select Add filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. A controlling LAN Network Manager program can define a filter to block or pass an alert to the host. The LAN Network Manager program processes alert filters in the following order: 1. Filters with an alert ID and a resource name 2. Filters with an alert ID only 3. Filters with a resource name and an alert type 4. Filters with a resource name only 5. Filters with an alert type only 6. User-defined filters. This window contains the following fields: Alert Action Whether the filter being defined will pass or block alerts. Resource name The name of the resource associated with the alert. Alert selection criteria The type of alerts to block or pass. See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a complete list of alerts generated by the LAN Network Manager program. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To add the filter as defined. The window remains open, allowing you to add another definition. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Alert action ═══ Indicate whether the specified alert is passed to the host (Pass) or blocked (Block). ═══ Alert ID ═══ Specify the hexadecimal number (8 digits) that is assigned to the alert by the resource that sent it. The alert ID is not equivalent to the message number used by the LAN Network Manager program. The following list displays both the message numbers that are used by the LAN Network Manager program and the corresponding alert IDs for those numbers: Message Number Alert ID DFIPD030 CEAE5DC1 DFIPD101 A9998C16 DFIPD107 1A56BAAE DFIPD107 57D16A21 DFIPD120 CDB6621F DFIPD123 6D3EF9A1 DFIPD180 EEB676C8 DFIPD183 91C0A9A7 DFIPD187 EE64FB52 DFIPD188 68882FCE DFIPD202 2102FCEB DFIPD203 2F36696E DFIPD204 698CCD51 DFIPD209 EB61E14F DFIPD209 F5DD263E DFIPD212 3BA03B60 DFIPD212 D2E24978 DFIPD213 DA7BC09D DFIPD213 9394369E DFIPD215 A676B230 DFIPD222 59F32622 DFIPD222 EB1D6ABB DFIPD306 608A29AF DFIPD323 F4CB43B4 DFIPD326 4F605FC5 DFIPD327 56B7ED4B DFIPD352 3CDEF8F5 DFIPD354 C1A08052 DFIPD355 F7A377AE DFIPD356 668E036D DFIPD399 Extracted from fields within the Alert Transport NMVT vector. DFIPD436 EA97F09A DFIPD437 D74CA4C5 DFIPD439 FFF92DB9 DFIPD441 E4D9B8CF DFIPD443 B6ED5F5D DFIPD444 CCC2FBEA DFIPD445 F6AD6C18 DFIPD446 5E83BF69 DFIPD447 0F01EBF6 DFIPD448 0F319213 DFIPD449 B7446B1E DFIPD990 37ABBCFF See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a more detailed list of the alerts that the LAN Network Manager program generates from the alert IDs. ═══ Resource name ═══ Specify the resource that is associated with the alert. You can specify the following resources: LANMGR The name of a LAN network management application, such as the LAN Network Manager program. LAN name The name of the managed domain of the LAN management application. Ring0xxx The segment number of a Token-Ring segment, where xxx is the segment number. CBUS0xxx The segment number of a PC Network segment, where xxx is the segment number. Bridge name The name of the bridge. ═══ Alert selection criteria ═══ Specify the type of alerts to block or pass to the host. Whether the selected alerts are blocked or passed is determined by what you enter in the Alert action field. To specify the type of alert to block or pass, select one of the following: All alerts All the alerts that are associated with the resource that you specify in the Resource name field. Alert ID Only those alerts having the specified ID. Permanent alerts Alerts that indicate that the adapter that is the source of the problem requires external intervention to recover from the error. Temporary alerts Alerts that indicate that the problem is temporary and that the adapter will recover. Performance alerts Alerts that indicate that the performance of the adapter that is the source of the problem has been degraded. The adapter is responding more slowly than the established, normal response time. Impending alerts Alerts that indicate that the adapter that is the source of the problem might encounter a critical error soon. Unknown alerts Alerts for which the LAN Network Manager program cannot determine the severity. ═══ Change filter ═══ To change whether the alert (defined by the filter) is blocked or passed, select Change filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. You cannot change any other parameters. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Change To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Delete filter ═══ To delete all the selected filters, select Delete filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it deletes any filters. This choice is not available if you do not select any filters. ═══ Set user filter ═══ To specify the name of a routine that acts as an alert filter, select Set user filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. You can also set the program status to Active or Inactive. See the LAN Network Manager Reference for information about a sample user-written alert filter. The Set User Filter window appears. ═══ 84. Set User Filter ═══ To specify the name of a routine that acts as an alert filter, select Set user filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. This window contains the following fields: Program status Whether the user-defined filter is active. Dynamic link library The name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the routine. Routine name The name of the routine that acts as the alert filter. See the LAN Network Manager Reference for information about a sample user-written alert filter. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Program status ═══ Specify whether to pass control to the specified routine before an alert is forwarded to the host. ═══ Dynamic link library ═══ Specify the name (1-8 characters) of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the routine that acts as the alert filter. Do not enter the file extension (.DLL). This DLL must be in the LM11 directory. ═══ Routine name ═══ Specify the name (1-31 characters) of the routine that you want to use as an alert filter. This routine should be contained in the DLL that you specify in the Dynamic link library field. If you set this routine to active, the routine determines whether the LAN Network Manager program blocks certain alerts or passes them to the host. ═══ Security parameters ═══ To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN Network Manager program, select Security parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The Security Parameters window appears. ═══ 85. Security Parameters ═══ To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN Network Manager program, select Security parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. If you enable password security, the LAN Network Manager main window is not displayed at startup. Instead, the LAN Network Manager icon appears. You then enter a user ID and password at the following times: o The first time that you select the LAN Network Manager program o Each time that you access the LAN Network Manager program after selecting Secure system. This window contains the following fields: Disable security To disable password security. Enable security To enable password security. Group ID The group ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in OS/2(T). User ID The user ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in OS/2. Password The valid password for this user ID. If you enable password security, you can also activate the security measures immediately by selecting Secure system from the System pull-down menu. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Disable security ═══ To disable password security for the LAN Network Manager program, select Disable security, on the Security Parameters window. If you disable password security, the LAN Network Manager program displays the LAN Network Manager main window after the copyright panel closes during startup. ═══ Enable security ═══ To enable password security for the LAN Network Manager program, select Enable security, on the Security Parameters window. If you enable password security, the LAN Network Manager main window is not displayed at startup. Instead, the LAN Network Manager icon appears. You then enter a user ID and password at the following times: o The first time that you select the LAN Network Manager program o Each time that you access the LAN Network Manager program after selecting Secure System. Note: If you are using OS/2 Version 2.0 and also using the security feature of the LAN Network Manager program, set the LAN Network Manager program up so that its minimized icon appear on the desktop. ═══ User ID ═══ Specify the ID of a user who has access to the LAN Network Manager program. The user ID must exist in the group ID LANETMGR. If password security has been enabled at some time during the current session, this field displays the last user ID for which password security was set. Your system administrator must use OS/2 User Profile Management Services to create the group ID LANETMGR and add to this group all of the user IDs permitted to access the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Password ═══ Specify the password that is defined for this ID in OS/2 User Profile Management. If the user ID does not require a password, leave this field blank. ═══ 86. Logon LAN Network Manager Window ═══ The Logon LAN Network Manager window is displayed if you try to access the LAN Network Manager program after the security measures are activated. This window contains the following fields: Group ID The group ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in OS/2(T). User ID The ID of a user who has access to the LAN Network Manager program. Password The password that is defined for this ID in OS/2 User Profile Management. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: OK To log on to the LAN Network Manager program with the specified user ID. Cancel To close this window without logging on to the LAN Network Manager program. Help To display extended help for the window, or contextual help for a field if the cursor is in a field. ═══ LAN Station Manager Options ═══ To specify what type of LAN Station Manager information, if any, you want to save in the LAN Network Manager database, select LAN Station Manager options, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The LAN Station Manager Options window appears. ═══ 87. LAN Station Manager Options ═══ To specify what type of LAN Station Manager information, if any, you want to save in the LAN Network Manager database, select LAN Station Manager options, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This information is saved for every station (in the LAN Network Manager program's managed domain) that is running the LAN Station Manager program. If you select both fields and if there are a large number of stations that are running LAN Station Manager, the information that is saved can use a significant amount of disk space. This window contains the following fields: Personal computer information To store information about the workstation, such as the type and serial number. LAN adapter attachment data To store attachment data about the adapter, such as the wall faceplate number. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ LNM user interface options ═══ To specify the user interface to use the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started, select LNM user interface options, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. The LNM User Interface Options window appears. ═══ 88. LNM User Interface Options ═══ To specify the user interface to use the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started, select LNM user interface options, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This window contains the following field: Graphical interface To use the LAN Network Manager program with the interface provided by the graphics facility the next time the program is started. Textual interface To use the base LAN Network Manager windows without using the interface provided by the graphics facility the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started. To apply the new interface option, select Exit to stop the LAN Network Manager program, and then start the program again. Any changes you make on this window will not be applied if you Restart. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Secure system ═══ To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access when you leave the LAN Network Manager workstation without shutting down the program, select Secure System, on the System pull-down menu. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it activates the security measures. This option is not available if security is disabled. You can enable security on the Security Parameters window. ═══ 89. Secure system ═══ To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access when you leave the LAN Network Manager workstation without shutting down the program, select Secure System, on the System pull-down menu. This option is not available if security is disabled. You can enable security on the Security Parameters window. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: OK To activate the security measures and iconize the LAN Network Manager program. Cancel To close this window without activating the security measures. Help To display extended help for the window. ═══ Restart ═══ To restart the LAN Network Manager program, select Restart, on the System pull-down menu. During a restart, the LAN Network Manager adapter momentarily closes and then re-opens. In addition: o All bridges are unlinked and are not relinked unless Automatic bridge link is specified in the Bridge Definition window and autolink is set to active on the Bridge Parameters window. o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter used, or maximum events in the event log) are applied. Any changes you make on the LNM User Interface Options window are not applied if you Restart. To apply the new interface option, select Exit to stop the LAN Network Manager program, and then start the program again. o The local segment is resynchronized. o All Soft-error reporting options set before the restart are lost. The adapter closing is a logical closing, which does not affect the adapter communications of any other applications. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it restarts. ═══ 90. Restart ═══ To restart the LAN Network Manager program, select Restart, on the System pull-down menu. During a restart, the LAN Network Manager adapter momentarily closes and then re-opens. In addition: o All bridges are unlinked and are not relinked unless Automatic bridge link is specified in the Bridge Definition window and autolink is set to active on the Bridge Parameters window. o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter used, or maximum events in the event log) are applied. Note: Any changes you make on the LNM user interface parameters window are not applied if you Restart. To apply the new interface option, select Exit to stop the LAN Network Manager program, then start the program again. o The local segment is resynchronized. o All Soft-error reporting options set before the restart are lost. The adapter closing is a logical closing, which does not affect the adapter communications of any other applications. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: OK To restart the LAN Network Manager program. Cancel To close this window without restarting the LAN Network Manager program. Help To display extended help for this window. ═══ Exit ═══ To stop the LAN Network Manager program and terminate all network management operations, select Exit, on the System pull-down menu. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it stops. ═══ 91. Exit ═══ To stop the LAN Network Manager program and terminate all network management operations, select Exit, on the System pull-down menu. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: OK To exit the LAN Network Manager program. Cancel To close this window without exiting the LAN Network Manager program. Help To display extended help for this window. ═══ 92. File ═══ Select File, from a view, to use one of the following functions: Save To save the view. This option is not available for the CAU level view. Print To print or plot a copy of the view. ═══ 93. Save ═══ To save a new view or save modifications to a view that you previously saved, select Save, on the File pull-down menu. If you save a network level view, the view is saved with a file name of NET.VIE. If you save a segment level view, the view is saved with a file name of SEGxxx.VIE, where xxx indicates the segment number. If this view has already been saved, a message is displayed to warn you that this view will overwrite the existing one. If you recreate the view or refresh the configuration, the LAN Network Manager program automatically overwrites the save file. This option is not available for the CAU level view. ═══ 94. Print ═══ To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select Print, on the File pull-down menu. When you select Print, the Print Options window appears. In this window, you can specify print options and the print destination. While you are printing, the Print pull-down choice changes to Stop printing. You can stop the print by selecting Stop printing. If you move the view, change the size of the view, or change an object in the view, the view window will not show the changes until the print is completed. ═══ Print Options ═══ To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select Print, on the File pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Destination A scrollable list of the possible print destinations. Fill Nodes Whether the nodes should be filled when the view is printed. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Print To close the window and print the view with the specified options. Printer Setup To specify more print options, such as the type of form to use, the print quality, and form-feed control. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Fill Nodes ═══ If you want the inside area of the node symbol filled in with color or a pattern when you print the view, select the Fill Nodes check box, on the Print Options window. The pattern or color with which a node is filled indicates its status or its type. If you do not need this type of information, you can save printing time by not filling the nodes. ═══ Destination ═══ In this window, select one of the listed destinations to indicate where you want the print output sent. Each destination is a printer or plotter that is defined to the OS/2(T) program through Print Manager. ═══ Printer Setup ═══ In this window, select the printer options, such as paper size, orientation, and other options that are supported by the printer. This window is provided by the OS/2 Print Manager. ═══ 95. Edit ═══ Select Edit, from a view, to use the following functions: Undo To cancel the last edit change you made to the view since you opened or saved it. Undo last x changes To cancel the most recent series of editing changes that you made to the view. Select object types To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text, or tackpoints) in the current view. Deselect all To deselect everything that you selected in the view, including objects or a region. Select objects in region To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text, tackpoints) in the region within a selection box. Add background picture To add a background picture to the view. Delete background picture To remove a background picture from the view. Add text/tackpoints To add text or tackpoints to the view. Stop adding text/tackpoints To exit Add text/tackpoints mode. Delete text/tackpoints To remove text or tackpoints from the view. Modify text To change text that you have added to the view. Move To move a selected object (node, text, or tackpoints) or a selected region of objects into another location in the view. ═══ 96. Undo ═══ To cancel the most recent editing change you made to the view, select Undo, on the Edit pull-down menu. Undo displays the most recent editing function. For example, if Move was your last editing change, the choice on the Edit pull-down menu is Undo move. You can continue to use Undo to step backwards through the editing changes you made to the view and cancel each change. Undo cancels only those changes that you made to the view by using the options from the Edit pull-down menu. You cannot select Undo until you make an editing change to the view. Undo does not cancel editing changes after you save a view. ═══ 97. Undo last x changes ═══ To cancel the most recent series of editing changes that you made to the view, select Undo last x changes, on the Edit pull-down menu. The x in the menu choice indicates the number of changes that you can undo. At any given time, the LAN Network Manager program recalls a maximum of 20 editing changes. If you zoom in on the view and select Undo last x changes, you cancel all the editing changes to the entire view, whether or not the affected objects are visible in the area to which you zoomed. You cannot select Undo last x changes until you make at least one editing change to the view. ═══ 98. Select object types ═══ To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types, on the Edit pull-down menu. The Select Object Types window appears. You can select one or more of the following types of objects: o Nodes o Links o Free Text o Tackpoints. Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, and then deselect the objects you do not want selected. ═══ 99. Select Object Types ═══ To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types, on the Edit pull-down menu. In this window, select one or more of the following: o Nodes o Links o Free Text o Tackpoints. Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then deselect the objects you do not want selected. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Select To close this window and cause the specified object types to be selected. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Nodes ═══ To select all the nodes in the view, select Nodes, on the Select Object Types window. When you select nodes, you automatically select any text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them. ═══ Links ═══ To select all the links in the view, select Links, on the Select Object Types window. When you select links, you automatically select any text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them. ═══ Free Text ═══ To select all the text in the view, select Free Text, on the Select Object Types window. This selects the text that you have added to the view, not the text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for resources. ═══ Tackpoints ═══ To select all the tackpoints in the view, select Tackpoints, on the Select Object Types window. ═══ 100. Deselect all ═══ To deselect everything that you selected in the view, including objects and regions, select Deselect all, on the Edit pull-down menu. Deselect all is not available unless you have selected one or more objects or a region. ═══ Select objects in region ═══ To select one or more types of the objects in a defined region, select a region in the view, and then choose Select objects in a region, on the Edit pull-down menu. The Select Objects in Region window appears. You can select one or more of the following from the specified region: o Nodes o Links o Free Text o Tackpoints. Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region, then deselect the individual objects that you do not want. ═══ 101. Select Objects in Region ═══ To select one or more types of the objects in a defined region, select a region in the view, and then choose Select objects in a region, on the Edit pull-down menu. In this window, choose one or more types of objects to select from the selected region. You can choose the following from the specified region: o Nodes o Links o Free Text o Tackpoints. Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region, then deselect the individual objects that you do not want. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Select To close this window and cause the specified object types to be selected. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Nodes ═══ To select all the nodes in the specified region, select Nodes, on the Select Objects in Region window. When you select nodes, you automatically select any text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them. ═══ Links ═══ To select all the links in the specified region, select Links, on the Select Objects in Region window. When you select links, you automatically select any text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them. ═══ Free text ═══ To select all the text within the specified region, select Free Text, on the Select Objects in Region window. This selects the text that you added to the view, not the text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for resources. ═══ Tackpoints ═══ To select all the tackpoints in the selected region, select Tackpoints, on the Select Objects in Region window. ═══ Add background picture ═══ To add a background picture to a view, select Add background picture, on the Edit pull-down menu. The Add Background Picture window appears. This window allows you to select the background picture you want to add to the view. Any valid OS/2(T) metafile can be added as a background picture. You can create a selection box in which to add the background picture. If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the center of the view. The picture is placed inside the selection box and behind all view information. When the picture is initially placed, it will be selected, and you can move or change the size of the selection box at this time. After you complete any adjustments to the picture, click inside the selection box to deselect the picture and add it to the view. After you add the background picture, you cannot directly select it or otherwise manipulate it. You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view, or with Delete background picture. You can add only one background picture to a view. To use a different background picture, first remove the current picture. ═══ 102. Add Background Picture ═══ To add a background picture to a view, select Add background picture, on the Edit pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Open filename The search criteria for a list of possible background pictures. Type of file The type of file for a list of possible background pictures. Drive The drive that the LAN Network Manager program searches for the file name. File The list of possible files that meet the search criteria. Directory The list of possible directories in the specified drive. Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or double-click on the name of the background picture. You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view, or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. You can add only one background picture to a view. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To close this window and cause the specified background picture to be added to the view. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Open filename ═══ Enter the file name of the background picture or enter search criteria. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard in your search criteria. ═══ Type of file ═══ Select a type of file from the list or use the default. ═══ Drive ═══ Enter the drive, or select a drive from the list, to specify which drive the LAN Network Manager program searches for the file that you specify in the Open filename field. ═══ File ═══ Select a file from the list of files that satisfies the search criteria in the Open filename field. ═══ Directory ═══ Select a subdirectory from the list of subdirectories in the current directory on the current disk. ═══ 103. Delete background picture ═══ To remove a background picture that you have added to a view, select Delete background picture, on the Edit pull-down menu. You can also remove a background picture with Undo if you have not saved the view. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. Delete background picture is available only when a view has a background picture. ═══ Add text/tackpoints ═══ To add text or tackpoints to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu. A cascading menu is displayed. Select one of the following from the cascading menu: o Free Text o Tackpoints. Select the location in the view in which to place the object. To exit Add text/tackpoints mode, do one of the following: o Press the Esc key o Double-click mouse button 2 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints. ═══ Free Text ═══ To add text to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Free Text from the cascading menu. When you select Free Text, the pointer changes into an I-beam pointer: To identify where you want to add the new text, move the I-beam pointer to the location, and click mouse button 1 or press the spacebar. The Add Text window appears. You remain in Add text until you do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu. You can remove text by using Undo, if you have not saved the changes, or Delete text/tackpoints. ═══ 104. Add Text ═══ To add text to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Free Text from the cascading menu. This window contains the following field: Text The text to be added to the view. When you select Free Text, the mouse pointer becomes an I-beam pointer. The text is added where you position the I-beam pointer. To add more text, move the I-beam pointer to the end of the text or to a position below it. Then click mouse button 1 or press the spacebar. This window appears again. To exit Add text entirely, first select Cancel to remove the window, then do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To add the text to the view where you positioned the I-beam pointer. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Text ═══ Enter up to 511 characters of text, including blanks. ═══ 105. Add tackpoints ═══ To add tackpoints to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Tackpoints from the cascading menu. You can use tackpoints to bend the links in your views. When you select Add tackpoints, the mouse pointer changes to an illegal pointer until you move the pointer over a link. Then the pointer changes into a tackpoint pointer . To add tackpoints: 1. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position on the link where you want the tackpoint. 2. Click mouse button 1, and drag the mouse to position the tackpoint. The link bends as you move the tackpoint. 3. When the tackpoint is in the correct position, release the mouse button to set the tackpoint in place. 4. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view. The following is an example of a view with two links, each containing a single tackpoint. The tackpoints are represented by small, white squares. Tackpoints are not normally visible unless the links they are contained in are selected. You remain in Add tackpoints until you do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu. You can also use the keyboard to add tackpoints. After you add a tackpoint, you can move it or delete it. ═══ Moving and deleting tackpoints ═══ To select a tackpoint, first select the link it is in. A tackpoint appears in the link as a white square. Then select the tackpoint you want to manipulate. This deselects the link and leaves only the tackpoint selected. You can then manipulate the tackpoint. To move a tackpoint, select it, click and hold mouse button 2, and drag the mouse until you move the tackpoint to its new location. To delete a tackpoint, do one of the following: o Select the tackpoints individually or all at once, and delete them by selecting Delete text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu. o Select Undo add, on the Edit pull-down menu, to delete the tackpoints you added, one at a time, beginning with the most recently added one. ═══ 106. Stop adding text/tackpoints ═══ To exit Add text/tackpoints mode, select Stop adding text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu. You can also exit Add text/tackpoints mode by pressing the Esc key or double-clicking on mouse button 2. ═══ 107. Delete text/tackpoints ═══ To remove text or tackpoints that you added to a view, select the text or tackpoint, and then select Delete text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu. You can delete text or tackpoints individually, or you can delete all the text or tackpoints in a selected region. If you accidentally delete one or more objects from a view, you can retrieve them in one of the following ways: o Select Undo clear/delete, on the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the deletions, one by one, beginning with the most recent. o Select Undo last x changes, on the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the latest series of editing changes you have made to the view. At any given time, the LAN Network Manager program recalls a maximum of 20 editing changes. o Select Close from the system menu and do not save the editing session. This cancels all the editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the view. You can delete only text that you have added to the view. ═══ Modify text ═══ To revise existing text that you added, select Modify text, on the Edit pull-down menu. To modify text, first select the text you want to modify. The Modify text window ═══ 108. Modify Text ═══ To make changes to existing text that you added, select the text you want to modify, and then select Modify text, on the Edit pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Text The text to be modified. You can type over the existing text or add more text. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Modify To change the selected text. Cancel To close this window without modifying the text. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Text ═══ Enter your changes to the text. You can enter or change up to 511 characters, including blanks. ═══ 109. Move ═══ To move a selected object or a selected region of objects to a different location in a view, select Move, on the Edit pull-down menu. To use Move, first select an object or a region. You can move nodes, text, and tackpoints, individually or all at once in a selected region. The two methods for moving objects or regions are: o Using Move o Dragging the object or region with mouse button 2. ═══ Moving an object by selecting move ═══ To move an object by selecting Move from the pull-down menu: 1. Select the object or region that you want to move. 2. Select Move from the Edit pull-down menu. A box appears around the selected object or region, with a move pointer inside it. 3. Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the object or region of objects. The box moves with the mouse pointer. To move the mouse pointer and selection box, use either the mouse or the mouse pointer movement keys on the keyboard. 4. When you have the box at the new location, either click mouse button 2 or press the spacebar. ═══ Moving an object by dragging it ═══ To move an object by dragging it: 1. Position the mouse pointer on the object or region you want to move. Press and hold down mouse button 2. A box appears around the object or region, with a move pointer inside it. 2. While holding down the button, drag the box to the new location. 3. Release the mouse button. ═══ 110. View ═══ Select View to use the following functions: Segment level To view all the stations and IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) attached directly to a segment. Stations attached to the segment through a CAU are not displayed. Segment level-hide CAU To view all the stations on the selected segment, whether or not the stations are attached to a CAU. CAU level To view a selected CAU and the stations that are attached to it. This option is not available from the network level view or from a CAU level view. Zoom To magnify or reduce a specific area of the view. This option is not available from a CAU level view. Find To locate a node or link in a view. Subnet To display all the resources that are attached up to 9 links away from a specific node. This option is not available from a segment level view or from a CAU level view. Show all To redisplay all objects hidden by Subnet. This option is not available from a segment level view or from a CAU level view. Refresh configuration To display all resources in the view, showing any new configuration information. Refresh status To update the view with current information for a selected node or link. Recreate view To have the LAN Network Manager program recreate the view according to its own layout facility. This option is not available from a CAU level view. Display labels To specify which text labels to display at a specific zoom level or on a specific CAU level view. ═══ Segment level ═══ To display a view of all the stations and IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are directly attached to the segment, select a segment, and then select one of the following: o Segment level, on the View pull-down menu o The View pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. The Segment Level View window is displayed. Stations that are attached to the segment through a CAU are not displayed. ═══ Segment level-hide CAU ═══ To display a view of all the stations on the selected segment, whether or not the stations are attached to the segment through an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select a segment, and then select Segment level-hide CAU, on the View pull-down menu. The Segment Level View window is displayed. If you select Segment level-hide CAU, the primary-in (PI) and primary-out (PO) adapters of the CAU are displayed, in addition to the station adapters that are attached to the CAU. If you select the PI or PO adapter of the CAU, the Profile function and the Resource information/status function show only station information for that adapter. ═══ CAU level ═══ To display a view of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the stations that are attached to it, select the CAU, and then select one of the following: o CAU level, on the View pull-down menu o The View pushbutton, on the CAU Information/Status window. The CAU Level View window is displayed. If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU on the View pull-down menu, you cannot select a CAU. In this case, do one of the following before trying to generate a CAU level view: o Close the view and reopen it by selecting Segment level on the View pull-down menu. o Use the Find function to locate the CAU. This option is not available from the network level view. ═══ 111. Zoom ═══ To magnify or reduce a specific area of the view, select Zoom, on the View pull-down menu. A cascading menu displays the following actions: Zoom in To magnify a specific area in a view. Zoom out To widen your perspective of a view. Zoom to fit To adjust the view to display all objects. Undo zoom To return the view to its configuration prior to the last Zoom. Subnet and Find automatically perform zooms. ═══ 112. Zoom in ═══ To magnify a selected region in the view, select the region and select Zoom, on the View pull-down menu. Then select Zoom in, on the cascading menu. This is what a view looks like when you select a region and then zoom-in on it. When you zoom in on a region, resource labels that were not displayed to you at the higher level might appear. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, that you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, on the View pull-down menu. ═══ 113. Zoom out ═══ To widen your perspective of a view, select a region and select Zoom, on the View pull-down menu. Then select Zoom out, on the cascading menu. Zoom out quadruples the display area of the view. This is what a view looks like when you zoom-out on it. The white box shows where the information in the original zoom is located in the new zoom. When you zoom-out on a view, resource labels that appeared at the lower level might not display. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, on the View pull-down menu. ═══ 114. Zoom to fit ═══ To adjust the view to display all objects, select Zoom, on the View pull-down menu. Then select Zoom to fit, on the cascading menu. ═══ 115. Undo zoom ═══ To return the view to its configuration prior to the last zoom, select Zoom, on the View pull-down menu. Then select Undo zoom, on the cascading menu. ═══ Find ═══ To locate a node or a link in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu. When you select Find, the Find window is displayed. Use the Find function to search for a resource according to segment number, bridge name, Controlled Access Unit ID, adapter address, or adapter name. To narrow the scope of the search, you can enter information in more than one search field. ═══ 116. Find ═══ To locate a node or a link in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu. Enter the segment number, the bridge name, the Controlled Access Unit (CAU) ID, or the adapter address or adapter name of the resource to be located. This window contains the following fields: Segment number The number of the segment that you want to locate. Bridge name The name of the bridge that you want to locate. CAU ID The identifier of the CAU that you want to locate. Adapter address or name The address or name of the adapter that you want to locate. To narrow the scope of the search, you can enter information in the Segment number field and either the CAU ID field or the Adapter field. This is useful, for example, if the same adapter address is present on more than one segment and you want to restrict the search to a particular segment. When you enter information in a search field, invalid search combinations become unavailable. When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the resource, and that resource is selected. The view level that appears varies according to the following criteria: o If you are locating a segment, the network level view is displayed. o If you are locating a bridge, the network level view is displayed. o If you are locating a station: - If the station is unique and the station is attached to a CAU, the CAU level view is displayed. - If the station is unique and the station is not attached to a CAU, the segment level view is displayed. - If the station exists on more than one segment, a window is displayed which allows you to select the segment. o If you are locating a CAU, the segment level view is displayed. If the resource is not found, an error message is displayed. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To search according to the information that you specified in the search fields. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Segment number ═══ Enter the number of the segment you want to locate. If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the Adapter field or in the CAU ID field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts its search for the adapter or CAU ID to the segment that you specify in this field. ═══ Bridge name ═══ Enter the name of the bridge that you want to locate. ═══ CAU ID ═══ Enter the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) that you want to locate. The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal digits of the CAU's primary-output (PO) adapter address. If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the Segment number field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts its search for the CAU ID to the specified segment. ═══ Adapter ═══ Enter the address or name of the adapter that you want to locate. The adapter address (12 hexadecimal digits) can be the universally administered address or the locally administered address. If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the Segment number field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts its search for the adapter to the specified segment. If you do not limit the scope of the search and the adapter address is found on more than one segment, a window is displayed from which you can select one segment. ═══ Find Adapter ═══ To locate an adapter in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu. If the LAN Network Manager program locates the adapter address on more than one segment, the Find Adapter window is displayed. Select the view that you want to display from the list box. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: View To display the view that you selected from the list box. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Subnet ═══ To display all resources that are located a specific number of links (or hop count) from the selected node, select a node, and then select Subnet, on the View pull-down menu. Subnet displays a subset of your network by displaying resources that are part of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want to display a subset of your network if your network is large and if there is only a particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate. When you select Subnet, the Subnet window is displayed. ═══ 117. Subnet ═══ To display all resources that are located a specific number of links (or hop count) from the selected node, select a node, and then select Subnet, on the View pull-down menu. Subnet displays a subset of your network by displaying resources that are part of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want to display a subset of your network if your network is large and if there is only a particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate. This window contains the following field: Hop count The number of node-to-node links to display. For example, if you request a subnet of Resource A with a hop count of 2, you see every resource attached up to two links away from Resource A, but no other resources. Following is an example of a subnet with a hop count of 2. When you redisplay resources, you see any changes that indicate status updates. The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the view as it was before Subnet, select Show all, in the View pull-down menu. You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Subnet To redisplay the view with the specified number of node-to-node links. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Hop Count ═══ From the list, select the number of node-to-node links to display for the selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9. For example, to see all resources up to 5 links away from Resource A, select 5 in the Hop Count field on the Subnet window. ═══ 118. Show all ═══ To redisplay all objects that you hid from the view by using the Subnet option, select Show all, on the View pull-down menu. Show all displays the Network Level View at the current zoom level with the Subnet area centered. Select from the zoom functions to return to your desired zoom level. Show all does not redisplay objects that you delete from the view with Delete text/tackpoints. Objects that you delete from the view are permanently removed when you save the edit. ═══ 119. Refresh configuration ═══ To display all resources in the view, with any new configuration information, select Refresh configuration, on the View pull-down menu. When you refresh configuration, the LAN Network Manager program automatically saves the view. When you refresh configuration, the LAN Network Manager program automatically saves the view. The program also maintains the current zoom level after you refresh configuration. However, if you zoom in on a view and then refresh configuration, the Undo option is unavailable. If you select Refresh configuration from a Subnet view, the LAN Network Manager program displays the network level view at the current zoom level, centering on the Subnet area. To have the LAN Network Manager program dynamically update the view as new configuration information becomes available, select Automatic configuration refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select On from the cascading menu. This option remains in effect until you turn it off. If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status change. To update the view with this new configuration information, select Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu. If an adapter has entered the network since you last refreshed the configuration, the LAN Network Manager program places the new adapter at the bottom of the view area. To change the position of a resource in the view, you can move the object yourself or you can have the LAN Network Manager program incorporate the object in the view by recreating the view. ═══ 120. Refresh status ═══ To update the view with any new status information for a node or link, select the node or link, and then select Refresh status, on the View pull-down menu. To refresh the status information for more than one object at a time, select a collection of objects first. If a resource goes into an error condition that should have been resolved, but the status of the resource is not updated in the view, you can use Refresh status to manually update the status for that resource. This can occur, for example, if a monitored adapter on a segment does not respond and then you change the definition of the adapter so that it is no longer monitored. The LAN Network Manager program never receives a recovery notification for this adapter, even if the adapter is operating normally. This option updates the status for only those resources that are already represented in the view. If any adapters have entered the network since you last refreshed the configuration of the view, you must first select Refresh configuration, on the View pull-down menu, to display the status of the new adapters. ═══ 121. Recreate view ═══ To have the LAN Network Manager program recreate the view according to its own layout facility, select Recreate view, on the View pull-down menu. This option deletes any customization that you have done, including background pictures and the placement of resources you have rearranged yourself. Recreate view also shows any new status and configuration information. If you recreate the view, the LAN Network Manager program automatically saves the view. ═══ Display labels ═══ To specify the labels to display at a specific zoom level, select Display labels, on the View pull-down menu. The LAN Network Manager program provides the text and icons that are displayed. When you select Display labels, the Display Labels window is displayed. Select the types of labels you want to display at the current zoom level. If you select a type of label, you display it for the current zoom level and each zoom-in level beyond the current level. If you deselect a type of label, you hide it for all zoom levels. Save the view before you close it. Then, the labels automatically appear every time you zoom in to the saved zoom level or to a level beyond that. When you reduce the size of the window, the zoom level decreases. Therefore, you might not see the labels you requested. If you are displaying a view of a large communication network, displaying labels can clutter the screen and make it hard to read, unless the window is maximized or unless you zoom in on a particular area. ═══ 122. Display Labels ═══ Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide at this zoom level. Selecting an item displays it; deselecting it hides it. You can select one or more of the following node labels: Segment number To display the 3-digit number associated with each segment. CAU ID/Node type To display the identifier associated with each IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the segment type and speed associated with each segment. Adapter address To display the locally administered adapter address for each station. This selection does not affect the network level view. Adapter name To display the user-defined adapter name for each station. This selection does not affect the network level view. Icon To display any icons that are associated with the objects in the view. The icons for each type of object are shown in the Legend - symbols window. You can select one or more of the following link labels: Bridge name To display the user-defined name of the bridge, which is specified on the Bridge Definition window. Bridge type To display the 4-digit number that indicates the type of bridge. Values for the bridge type are: x001 Bridge connecting two Token-Ring segments x002 Bridge connecting two CSMA/CD LANs x003 Bridge connecting Token-Ring to CSMA/CD x004 Bridge connecting Token-Ring to 3174-Peer. If x = 0, the bridge is a local bridge; if x = 8, the bridge is a remote bridge. Bridge number To display the 1-digit number that is specified in the bridge program. This number is often used to differentiate between two parallel bridges that connect the same segments. Not used Reserved for future use. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To display the selected labels. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 123. Options ═══ Select Options, from a view, to use the following functions: Automatic configuration refresh To specify whether the view is automatically refreshed with current configuration information. Legend To display or change the symbols that indicate the types of resources and the colors that indicate their statuses. ═══ 124. Automatic configuration refresh ═══ To specify whether you want the LAN Network Manager program to dynamically refresh the view each time new configuration information becomes available, select Automatic configuration refresh, on the Options pull-down menu. From the cascading menu, set automatic configuration refresh On or Off The default setting is On. Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 125. Automatic configuration refresh on ═══ To set automatic configuration refresh on, select Automatic configuration refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select On from the cascading menu. Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 126. Automatic configuration refresh off ═══ To set automatic configuration refresh off, select Automatic configuration refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select Off from the cascading menu. If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status change. To update the view with this new configuration information, select Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu. Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 127. Legend ═══ To display the symbols and colors that are used to represent nodes, links, and status in views, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. A cascading menu is displayed. Select from among the following options: Color To change one or more of the status colors used in the view. Symbol To change one or more of the node symbols used in the view. Change all to default To return the colors and symbols to their defaults. ═══ Color ═══ To display or change the colors that are used to indicate statuses in the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Color, on the cascading menu. The Legend - colors window appears. ═══ 128. Legend - colors ═══ To display or change the colors that are used to indicate statuses in the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Color, on the cascading menu. This window contains a scrollable list of statuses and their associated colors. Select a status from the list that you want to change, and then select the Change pushbutton. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changes and display the view with the new colors. Change To specify a new color for the selected status. The Legend - change color window appears. Default To restore the settings to the default colors. This option deletes any customization that you have done to the colors. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 129. Legend - change color ═══ To specify a new color for the selected status, select the Change pushbutton, on the Legend - colors window. Use the three scroll bars to adjust the New color. For example, to set the New color to blue, adjust Red and Green to 0 and Blue to 255. For yellow, adjust Red and Green to 255 and Blue to 0. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Change To apply the new color. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Symbol ═══ To display or change the symbols that are used to indicate the types of node in the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Symbol, on the cascading menu. The Legend - symbols window appears. ═══ 130. Legend symbols ═══ To display or change the symbols that are used to indicate the types of node in the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Symbol, on the cascading menu. This window contains a scrollable list of resources and their associated symbols. Select a symbol that you want to change from the list and then select the Change pushbutton. You cannot change the following symbols: o The star that represents the bridges that have been defined but never linked o The straight line that represents a local bridge o The jagged line that represents a remote bridge o The circle with a slash through it that represents a lobe that is in use but has been disabled o The X that represents a lobe receptacle that is not in use and has also been disabled. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changes and display the view with the new symbols. Change To specify a new symbol for the selected resource. The Legend - change symbol window is displayed. Default To restore the settings to the default symbols. This option deletes any customization you have done. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 131. Legend - change symbol ═══ To specify a new symbol for the node type that you selected on the Legend - symbols window, select a symbol from the scrollable list, and then select the Change pushbutton. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Change To apply the new symbol. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 132. Change all to default ═══ To return the colors and symbols to the defaults set by the LAN Network Manager program, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Change all to default, on the cascading menu. This option deletes any customization you have done to the symbols. ═══ 133. Actions ═══ Select Actions to use the following functions: Resource information/status To display information for selected resources. Profile To display the profile for a selected object. Test segment To test a selected segment for data-transfer capability. Segment status details To display error information and the status for the selected segment. Link bridge To attempt to link to the selected bridge. Unlink bridge To unlink from the selected bridge. Add definition To add a definition for a bridge, a station, or Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Change definition To change a definition for a bridge, a station, or CAU. Delete definition To delete the definition for a selected bridge, station, or CAU. CAU code update To update the microcode in a CAU. This option is not available from the network level view or from a segment level view that you generate by selecting Segment level-hide CAU. ═══ Resource information/status ═══ To display information for a selected resource, select a resource, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu. From the network level view, you can display information about: o Segments o Bridges From the segment level view or from the CAU level view, you can display information about: o Other segments o Bridges o IBM 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) o Stations ═══ 134. Segment Information/Status ═══ To display information for a segment, select the segment, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Segment number The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the selected segment. Segment status The last known status of the selected segment. Segment type The type and transmission speed of the selected segment. Linked bridges The number of bridges on this segment that are currently linked to the LAN Network Manager program. Ring utilization The percentage that is being used of the total data-transmission capacity of the segment. This information is available only if a station on the ring is currently managed by the LAN Network Manager program and has installed the LAN Station Manager program, the hardware that supports the ring-utilization parameter, and either Extended Services 1.0 (ES 1.0), for OS/2(T), or LAN Support Program 1.2 or higher, for DOS. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: View To display a view of the selected segment. Test To test the selected segment for data-transfer capability. Status details To display error information and the status for the selected segment. Events To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for the selected segment. Refresh To redisplay the window, with any updated information. Next To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next selected object. This pushbutton is not available if you have not selected more than one object or if the Resource Information/Status window for the last selected object is currently displayed. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 135. Bridge Information/Status ═══ To display information for a bridge, select the bridge, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-assigned name, as defined on the Bridge definition window. Bridge number The 1-digit hexadecimal number that is specified in the bridge program configuration file. Bridge status The last known status of the selected bridge. The statuses are: o Normal o Not linked o Link busy LAN segment 1 The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the first segment to which the bridge is attached. Adapter 1 The 12-digit hexadecimal number of the bridge adapter attached to the first LAN segment. LAN segment 2 The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the second segment to which the bridge is attached. Adapter 2 The 12-digit hexadecimal number of the bridge adapter attached to the second LAN segment. Automatic link Whether this bridge links automatically. This is defined on the Bridge definition window. Performance notification The interval (in minutes) at which the bridge sends performance information. This is defined on Performance Data window. Comments Additional information about the bridge. This is defined on the Bridge definition window. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Link To attempt to link to the selected bridge. Unlink To unlink from the selected bridge. Profile To display the profile for the selected bridge. Events To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for the selected bridge. Refresh To redisplay the window, with any updated information. Next To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next selected object. This pushbutton is not available if you have not selected more than one object or if the Resource Information/Status window for the last selected object is currently displayed. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 136. Station Information/Status ═══ To display information for a station, select the station, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Adapter name The name assigned to the adapter in the station definition. Adapter address The 12-character hexadecimal address of the adapter. NAUN name The name assigned to the adapter of the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN). NAUN address The 12-character hexadecimal address of the adapter of the nearest active upstream neighbor. Adapter status The current status for the adapter. Monitored Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors this station as a critical resource. This is defined on the Station Definition window. Trace Whether this adapter is authorized to gather trace e information. This is defined on the Station Definition window. CAU ID If the adapter is connected to an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), the ID of the CAU. This is defined on the Station Definition window or obtained from the CAU. Lobe receptacle number If the adapter is connected to a CAU, the lobe receptacle number to which it is attached. This is defined on the Station Definition window or obtained from the CAU. Lobe attachment module If the adapter is connected to a CAU, the number of the attachment module to which it is connected. This is defined on the Station Definition window or obtained from the CAU. Authorization time The days and times this adapter is authorized to be on the network. This is defined on the Station Definition window. Comments User comments entered on the Station Definition window. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Profile To query the station for its parameters and status information. Remove To remove this station from the network. This pushbutton is available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Events To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for the selected station. Refresh To redisplay the window, with any updated information. Next To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next selected object. This pushbutton is not available if you have not selected more than one object or if the Resource Information/Status window for the last selected object is currently displayed. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 137. CAU Information/Status ═══ To display information for an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the CAU, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Access unit ID The ID of the access unit. Access unit status The last known status of the CAU. The statuses are: o Normal o Wrap RO o Wrap RI o Wrap RI/RO o Inactive. LAN segment number The number of the segment to which this CAU is attached. Access unit location Location information supplied by the user. Number of attached modules The number of lobe attachment modules on this CAU. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: View To display a view of the CAU and its attached devices. Profile To query the CAU for its parameters. Code update To update the microcode in the CAU. Events To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for the CAU. Refresh To redisplay the window, with any updated information. Next To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next selected object. This pushbutton is not available if you have not selected more than one object or if the Resource Information/Status window for the last selected object is currently displayed. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 138. Test segment ═══ To test a segment for data-transfer capability, select the segment, and then select one of the following: o Test segment, on the Actions pull-down menu o Test segment, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window o The Test pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. The LAN Network Manager program responds with the results of the test when it is complete. If the test fails, examine the event log for indications of the problem. This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating with limited function. ═══ 139. Segment status details ═══ To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment, and then select one of the following: o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. Status details are available for segments whose status is: o Beaconing o Continuous carrier o Soft errors. Status details are not available for segments that are: o Normal o Wrapped o Unknown. If the segment you selected is experiencing soft errors, the Soft Error Conditions window is displayed. If the segment you selected is beaconing, the Beaconing Error Conditions window is displayed. If the segment you selected is experiencing a continuous carrier, the Carrier Error Condition window is displayed. ═══ 140. Soft Error Conditions ═══ To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment, and then select one of the following: o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. If the segment you selected is experiencing soft errors, the Soft Error Conditions window is displayed and lists the first 10 adapters encountered that are experiencing soft errors on that segment at the time of request. This window contains the following fields: LAN segment number/type The number and type of the Token-Ring segment that is reporting the soft error condition. LAN segment status The status of the LAN segment that is reporting the soft error condition. Adapter The address and name (if defined) of each adapter that is experiencing soft errors. A maximum of 10 adapters are displayed. NAUN The address and name (if defined) of the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) for each of the adapters listed for the segment. Errors The error count for the adapter. One asterisk (*) next to the error count value indicates that an adapter is in pre-weight-exceeded condition. Two asterisks (**) next to the error count value indicate that an adapter is in weight-exceeded condition. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Refresh To redisplay the window with any updated information. Profile To display the profile of the selected station. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 141. Beaconing Error Conditions ═══ To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment, and then select one of the following: o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. If the segment you selected is beaconing, the Beaconing Error Conditions window is displayed. This window contains the following fields: LAN segment number/type The number and type of the Token-Ring segment that is reporting the beaconing error condition. LAN segment status The status of the LAN segment that is reporting the beaconing error condition. Beaconing station The address and name (if defined) of the adapter that is beaconing. NAUN station The adapter address and name (if defined) for the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) of the beaconing adapter. Beacon type The type of beacon reported. There are four types of beaconing: X'0001' Recovery mode set X'0002' Signal loss error X'0003' Streaming signal that is not a claim-token frame X'0004' Streaming signal that is a claim-token frame or intermediate detection of hard error. For more information about beaconing, read the IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture Reference. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Profile To display the profile of the selected station. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 142. Carrier Error Condition ═══ To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment, and then select one of the following: o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window. If the segment you selected is experiencing carrier conditions, the Carrier Error Conditions window is displayed. This window contains the following fields: LAN segment number/type The segment number and type of the PC Network(T) segment that is reporting the carrier error condition. LAN segment status The status of the PC Network(T) segment that is reporting the carrier error condition. Adapter The address and name (if defined) of the adapter that is reporting the carrier error condition. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Profile To display the profile of the selected station. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 143. Add definition ═══ To add a definition for a bridge, station, or IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. A cascading menu is displayed. Select one of the following: o Add station o Add bridge o Add CAU. ═══ 144. Change definition ═══ To change the definition for the selected bridge, station, or Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select an object, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. Depending upon the type of object selected, one of the following is displayed: o Station definition o Bridge definition o Controlled Access Unit definition. From the network level view, you can change only a bridge definition. ═══ 145. Station Definition ═══ To add a station definition, do one of the following: o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu, and then select Add station from the cascading menu. o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. o Select an undefined adapter from the Stations window or the Configuration List, and then select Change definition on the Actions pull-down menu. When the Station Definition window is displayed, the LAN Network Manager program fills in the adapter address. To change an existing definition, do one of the following: o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. If you are changing a station definition, you cannot change both the adapter address and the adapter name. When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Station Definition window appears. This window contains the following fields: Adapter name The symbolic name assigned to the adapter. Adapter address The hexadecimal address (12 digits) assigned to the adapter. Monitor this adapter Whether the adapter is monitored by the LAN Network Manager program. Authorize tracing Whether the adapter is authorized to trace. CAU ID The ID of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), if any, to which this adapter is attached. Lobe attachment module The number of the lobe attachment module to which this adapter is attached. Lobe receptacle number The number of the lobe receptacle to which this adapter is attached. Time The start and end times for the time period that this adapter is authorized to access the network. Days The start and end days for the time period that this adapter is authorized to access the network. Comments Your comments about this adapter. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add or Change To add or change the definition for this station. When you add, the window remains open, allowing you to add another definition. When you change, the definition is changed, and the window closes. If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Add. If you selected Change definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Adapter name ═══ Enter the adapter name (1-16 characters). The adapter name can be any combination of A-Z, 0-9, @, #, $, and %. To avoid confusion between the adapter name and the hexadecimal address, do not assign a name that is 12 characters that are a combination of numbers and the letters A-F. ═══ Adapter address ═══ Enter the adapter address (12 hexadecimal digits). The adapter address can be the universally administered address or a locally administered address. ═══ Monitor this adapter ═══ Specify whether you want the LAN Network Manager program to monitor this adapter. The default setting is No. If you select Yes, also set Adapter monitoring on the Miscellaneous Parameters window to Active. ═══ Authorize tracing ═══ Specify whether this adapter is authorized to enter the network as a frame-tracing tool. The default setting is No. If you select Yes, also set Tracing authorization on the Miscellaneous Parameters window to All or to Stations defined to trace. ═══ CAU ID ═══ Enter the identifier (8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to which the station is attached. The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal digits of the CAU's primary-output (PO) adapter address. If you enter data in this field, also specify the lobe receptacle number and the lobe attachment module. If Access control is Active, the CAU ID is verified. If Access control is not Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU. If the ID of the CAU to which the station is attached matches the CAU ID in the station's definition, the station is allowed network access. If the ID is not authorized, the station might be denied network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Lobe receptacle number ═══ Enter the receptacle number (1-20) of the lobe on the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) on which the station resides. This field is not available unless you enter a CAU ID. If Access control is Active, the lobe receptacle number is verified. If Access control is not Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU. If the number of the lobe receptacle to which the station is attached matches the lobe receptacle number in the station's definition, the station is allowed network access. If the number is not authorized, the station might be denied network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Lobe attachment module ═══ Enter the lobe attachment module (1-4) on the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to which the station is attached. This field is not available unless you enter a CAU ID. If Access control is Active, the lobe attachment module is verified. If Access control is not Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU. If the lobe receptacle module to which the station is attached matches the lobe receptacle module in the station's definition, the station is allowed network access. If the module is not authorized, the station might be denied network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Time authorized ═══ From the list box, select the start and end times for the time period during which the adapter is authorized to access the network, or use the  and  cursor movement keys to scroll through the possible values. The default start time is 0000. The default end time is 2400. To prevent access for an address that is already in the LAN Network Manager database, specify 0000 for both the start and end times. If Access control is Active, the time is verified. If the time is within the start and end times, the station is allowed network access. If the time is not within the start and end times, the station might be denied network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Days authorized ═══ Select the start and end days for the time period during which the adapter is authorized to access the network. Select the days from the list box or use the  and  cursor movement keys to scroll through the possible values. The default start day is Sunday. The default end day is Saturday. If Access control is Active, the day is verified. If the day is within the start and end days, the station is allowed network access. If the day is not within the start and end days, the station might be denied network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window. ═══ Comments ═══ Enter your comments about this station. You can enter up to 40 characters in any combination of letters, numbers, and characters (including blanks). The LAN Network Manager program does not try to interpret these characters. If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field. Read the LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility. Comments that you enter in this window appear in the Station Profile window. ═══ 146. Controlled Access Unit Definition ═══ To add a definition for an IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU), do one of the following: o Select Add definition from the Actions pull-down menu, and then select Add CAU, on the cascading menu. o Select Add CAU definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. To change an existing definition, do one of the following: o Select a CAU, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. o Select a CAU, and then select Change CAU definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. If you are changing a CAU definition, you cannot change the CAU ID. When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Controlled Access Unit Definition window appears. This window contains the following fields: CAU ID The ID of the CAU. CAU location The physical location of the CAU. Attachment module Which attachment module you want to define. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add or Change Define the selected attachment module or change attachment module information. The Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition window appears. If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Add. If you selected Change definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ CAU ID ═══ Enter the identifier (8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal digits of the CAU's primary-output (PO) adapter address. If you are changing a CAU definition, you cannot change the CAU ID. ═══ CAU location ═══ Enter the location (1-8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). This is the physical location of the CAU, such as the room number of a wiring closet. ═══ Add/Change definitions for attachment module ═══ Specify the attachment module (1-4) that you want to define. When you select the Add or Change pushbutton, the Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition window appears. ═══ 147. Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition ═══ To add or change the definition of a lobe attachment module, select an attachment module, and then select the Add or Change pushbutton, on the Controlled Access Unit Definition window. Also, you can select Show/Change lobe definition on the Actions pull-down menu of the Lobe Attachment Module x Details window. The Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition window appears. This window displays the current lobe definition for the selected lobe attachment module. Type the building and room number for up to 20 lobes. Use the down cursor movement key () to move forward through the fields and the up cursor movement key () to move backward through the fields. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add or Change To add or change the definition of the attachment module and close the window. If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Add. If you selected Change definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 148. Bridge Definition ═══ To add a bridge definition, do one of the following: o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu, then select Add bridge from the cascading menu. o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. To change an existing definition, do one of the following: o Select a bridge, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. o Select a bridge, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. If you are changing a bridge definition, you cannot change the bridge name. When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Bridge Definition window appears. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name of this bridge. Bridge adapters The names or addresses of the adapters for this bridge. Automatic bridge link Whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links to this bridge. Comments Your comments about this bridge. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add or Change To add or change the definition of this bridge. When you add, the window remains open, allowing you to add another definition. When you change, the definition is changed, and the window closes. If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Add. If you selected Change definition to enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Bridge name ═══ Enter the name (1-8 characters) of the bridge. The bridge name can be a combination of A-Z, 0-9, @, #, $, and %. The character string `Unknown' is not valid for this field. ═══ Bridge adapters ═══ Enter the adapter names or addresses for the adapters of this bridge. You cannot change the information in the bridge adapter fields if the bridge is linked. An adapter name is a user-defined name (1-16 characters) for the adapter. You can define an adapter name on the Station Definition window. An adapter address is the hexadecimal number (12 digits) that identifies a LAN adapter. This address can be the universally defined address or the locally administered address for the adapter. ═══ Automatic bridge link ═══ Specify whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links the bridge when a new bridge definition is added, when an existing bridge definition is changed, and when the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. The LAN Network Manager program logs a message that indicates whether the link is successful or unsuccessful. If you select Yes for automatic bridge link on this window, also select Active for Automatic bridge link on the Bridge Parameters window. If the LAN Network Manager program is not able to link, or if the link is terminated, the LAN Network Manager program tries to re-establish the link every n minutes, where n is the retry-time interval value defined on the Bridge Parameters Window. The LAN Network Manager program logs a message when the link is established. To stop the LAN Network Manager program from attempting to establish a link with a bridge, select No. If you select No, the bridge is not linked automatically or relinked if the bridge link is terminated. ═══ Comments ═══ Enter your comments about this bridge. You can enter up to 40 characters in any combination of letters, numbers, and characters (including blanks). The LAN Network Manager program does not try to interpret these characters. If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field. Read the LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility. Comments that you enter in this window appear in the Bridge Profile window. ═══ Delete definition ═══ To delete the definition of a selected bridge, station, or IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the object, and then select Delete definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. When you delete a bridge, the line that represents the bridge is removed from the view. You cannot delete definitions for bridges to which the LAN Network Manager program is linked or for CAUs with which the LAN Network Manager program is registered. From the network level view, you can delete only bridge definitions. Deleting a bridge, station, or CAU definition does not delete the profile information for that object from the LAN Network Manager database. ═══ CAU code update ═══ To update the microcode for selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), select the CAU, and then select one of the following: o CAU code update, on the Actions pull-down menu o Update enable, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This option is available if you select one or more CAUs and if all CAUs that are selected are registered to this LAN Network Manager program. The Controlled Access Unit Update Enable window is displayed. ═══ 149. Controlled Access Unit Update Enable ═══ To update the microcode for selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), select the CAU, and then select one of the following: o CAU code update, on the Actions pull-down menu o Update enable, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This option enables the CAU for updates but does not load the program file into the CAU. Also, the option enables a CAU under one of the following conditions: o The CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program. o The CAU is not registered with any LAN Network Manager program, and the CAU has detected the need for a microcode update. Under either of these conditions, the CAU then initiates the program update from the loader device. This window contains the following fields: File name The name of the program to be loaded, including the path and extension. Loader address or name The adapter name or address of the loader device. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Enable To close this window and update the microcode in the CAU. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ File name ═══ Enter the name (1-24 characters) of the file that you want to load into the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Include path and extension information in the name. If you do not enter a path, the LAN Network Manager program searches its current directory. ═══ Loader address or name ═══ Enter the adapter address or the name of the loader device that contains the program to be loaded. If you enter a name, that name must be defined in the LAN Network Manager database. This field is optional. However, if this field is left blank, the Controlled Access Unit (CAU) attempts to find the requested file in a device that has a functional address of RPU. If the CAU does not find this device, it sends an alert to all LAN Network Manager programs. ═══ Profile ═══ To display the profile for resource, select the resource, and then select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu. Depending on the type of resource you select, one of the following is displayed: o Bridge Profile o Station Profile o CAU Profile From the network level view you can display only bridge profiles. This option is not available if LAN Network Manager program is operating in limited mode. ═══ 150. Bridge Profile ═══ To display status information about a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the following: o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Profile pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Bridge version information The version of the bridge program. The number displayed is the value returned from the bridge and contains 13 characters as follows: Characters 1-2 Common version identifier Characters 3-4 Common release identifier Characters 5-6 Common modification identifier Characters 7-13 Licensed Program number Bridge type The type of bridge. Values for this parameter are: x001 Bridge connecting two Token-Ring segments x002 Bridge connecting two CSMA/CD segments x003 Bridge connecting a Token-Ring to a CSMA/CD segment x004 Bridge connecting a Token-Ring to a 3174-Peer segment. If x = 0, the bridge is a local bridge; if x = 8, the bridge is a remote bridge. Routing information The route that the LAN Network Manager program is using to communicate with the bridge. If this field is blank, there is no route used to communicate with this bridge (the bridge is attached to the local segment of the LAN Network Manager program). Bridge number A user-defined value that uniquely identifies a bridge among those bridges that span the same two LAN segments, so that parallel bridges can be distinguished. Automatic bridge link Whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links to this bridge. LAN segment type The type of port defined by the port identifier. Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer. LAN segment number The number of the LAN segment connected to the bridge port. Adapter address The address of the bridge adapter that is attached to the LAN segment. Adapter name The user-defined name for the adapter address. Comments Additional information about the bridge, as defined on the Bridge Definition window. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the bridge parameters. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Bridge Profile window, to use the following functions: Configuration parameters To display and change bridge configuration parameters. SRTB parameters To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging parameters. This option is available only if the selected bridge is an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge. Reporting link parameters To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager programs that are linked to the bridge and to change the reporting link passwords that access the bridge. Performance data To display performance data for the selected bridge. ═══ Configuration parameters ═══ To display and change the configuration parameters,such as the bridge number, the automatic link status of the bridge, and the hop-count limit of the bridge, select Configuration parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. The Configuration Parameters window is displayed. If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only the Automatic bridge link. ═══ 151. Configuration Parameters ═══ To display and change the configuration parameters for the bridge, select Configuration parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. Parameters that are not relevant to the selected bridge are unavailable. Bridge aging time, for instance, is greyed out if the bridge does not contain a transparent-bridging database. Warning: Changes to bridge configurations might adversely affect the network. Verify any changes with your network administrator. If you change the bridge number or the LAN segment number, relink to the bridge. If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only the Automatic bridge link field. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Bridge number The user-defined value that uniquely identifies a bridge among those bridges that span the same two LAN segments, so that parallel bridges can be distinguished. Automatic bridge link Whether autolink is active for the bridge. If it is active, the LAN Network Manager program tries to maintain a communication link with the bridge management server. Largest frame size The size (in bytes) of the largest frame that is forwarded by the bridge or a particular port. This value might be either the largest frame that can be transmitted on an attached LAN segment or the buffer size restrictions. All-routes broadcast frames use 17801 bytes. Frame forwarding status The frame-forwarding status of the route. Single-route broadcast mode Whether the bridge is configured for automatic forwarding of single-route broadcast traffic. Bridge aging time The number of seconds, in 10 second increments, used for aging out a dynamic entry on the bridge's filtering database after its last use. Bridge maximum transit time The maximum time, in seconds, that can elapse between the reception and transmission of a forwarded frame. Frames held by the bridge longer than this time are discarded. LAN segment type The type of port that defined is by the port identifier. Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer. LAN segment number The 3-digit hexadecimal number (001-FFF) of the LAN segment connected to the bridge port. Single-route broadcast (setting for port) Whether the port is enabled to accept and forward single-route broadcast frames when the Single-route broadcast parameter is set to manual at the bridge-level. Hop count limit The number of bridges that a frame can traverse. Early Token Release Whether Early Token Release (ETR) is enabled for the Token-Ring port of the bridge when the ring is operating at 16 Mbps. Locally administered adapter address or name The locally administered address that the bridge should use the next time the bridge is restarted. Parameter server The status of the parameter server in the bridge. Error report server The status of the error monitor server in the bridge. Configuration report server The status of the configuration monitor server in the bridge. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Apply To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Filter Definitions To view and update the filter definitions that control the filter function of the bridge. This pushbutton is available only if the selected bridge is an IBM(T) 8209 LAN Bridge. Forwarding Parameters To view and update parameters and databases that are related to the various frame-forwarding options, such as message filtering and protocol conversion. This pushbutton is available only if the selected bridge is an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Bridge number ═══ Specify the identifier in the bridge-program configuration file. The bridge number distinguishes one parallel bridge from another. Parallel bridges connect the same two LAN segments. The bridge number is 1 hexadecimal digit. If you change this value, relink the bridge. ═══ Frame forwarding status ═══ Specify whether the bridge forwards frames between the LAN segments that it connects. ═══ Single-route broadcast mode ═══ Specify whether: o The bridge determines the single-route broadcast setting for each of the bridge adapters (Automatic). This prevents having several copies of a frame on the same LAN segment by controlling the specific route that a frame can take. o The LAN Network Manager program specifies the single-route broadcast setting for each of the bridge adapters (Manual). You can change the single-route broadcast mode setting for one or both bridge adapters. The bridge adapters can have different single-route broadcast settings. If the Single-route broadcast field is set to No for a bridge adapter, single-route broadcast frames do not pass through the bridge. Broadcast frames are not affected by the single-route broadcast setting and can pass through any bridge. ═══ LAN segment number ═══ Specify the 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies each of the LAN segments connected by the bridge. If you change either of these numbers, relink the bridge. ═══ Single-route broadcast (setting for port) ═══ Specify whether single-route broadcasting is active for each segment. If you select No, single-route broadcast frames do not pass through the bridge to that segment. When you change the setting for the port, the LAN Network Manager program attempts to change the mode. The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge does not allow the LAN Network Manager program to change the single-route broadcast mode for the bridge. In this case, you receive message DFIPD456, with a return code of 7. The setting for the port is changed, but it might be changed back by the bridge. ═══ Hop count limit ═══ Specify the maximum number of bridges (1-7) through which a frame can pass on the way to its destination. If the number of bridges the frame has traversed before getting to the current one is greater than or equal to the hop-count limit for that port, the frame is not forwarded on this route. Hop count applies to all broadcast frames except single-route broadcast frames. ═══ Early Token Release ═══ Specify whether Early Token Release (ETR) is enabled for each segment. This field applies only to Token-Ring segments with a transmission speed of 16 megabits per second (Mbps). ═══ Locally administered adapter address or name ═══ Specify the address or name to use the next time the bridge is restarted for each LAN adapter. ═══ Parameter server ═══ Specify whether the parameter-server function of the bridge is enabled. If you do not enable this function, no adapter insertion reports are generated. ═══ Error report server ═══ Specify whether the error-report-server function of the bridge is enabled. If you do not enable this function, the ring error monitor does not report ring errors to the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Configuration report server ═══ Specify whether the configuration-report-server (CRS) function of the bridge is enabled. If you do not enable this function, the bridge does not generate nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) changes. ═══ Bridge aging time ═══ Specify the number of seconds, in 10 second increments, used for aging out a dynamic entry on the bridge's filtering database after its last use. ═══ Bridge maximum transit time ═══ Specify the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between the reception and transmission of a forwarded frame. Frames held by the bridge longer than this time are discarded. ═══ 152. Filter Definitions ═══ To change the filter definitions that control the filter function of the bridge, select Filter definitions, on the Configuration Parameters window. There are two types of filters that you can define: o Address range filters These filters prevent the frames that are originated by specific LAN stations from traversing the bridge. You can filter according to the source address, the destination address, or both. You can also specify the low and high address values of the address range for which you want to filter. o Criteria range filters These filters prevent frames of a particular type from traversing the bridge or allow only a particular type to get through. You can specify the low and high address values of the filtering range. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name A user-defined name that identifies the bridge. LAN segment number The number of the LAN segment connected to the bridge port. LAN segment type The type of port that is defined by the port identifier. Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer. Address range filter definitions The frame-filtering characteristics of the identified port. Frames with source or destination addresses within the specified ranges are discarded by the bridge. A value of X'000000000000' in both the high and low ranges of a filter nullifies that filter. Source address low The low source address for the address range filter. Source address high The high source address for the address range filter. Destination address low The low destination address for the address range filter. Destination address high The high destination address for the address range filter. Criteria range filter definition The filter characteristics of the identified port. A value of X'0000' in both the high and low ranges of a filter value nullifies that filter. Filter offset The byte offset in the medium access control (MAC) information field of the 2-byte value to be compared against the filter ranges. If the value of the 2-byte field is outside both sets of ranges, the frame is discarded. The range is 0-100. Range 1 low The low value of range 1. Range 1 high The high value of range 1. Range 2 low The low value of range 2. Range 2 high The high value of range 2. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a field. The pushbutton is also not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Source address low ═══ In Source address low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the low end of the range of source addresses. ═══ Source address high ═══ In Source address high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the high end of the range of source addresses. range filter. ═══ Destination address low ═══ In Destination address low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the low end of the range of destination addresses. range filter. ═══ Destination address high ═══ In Destination address high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the high end of the range of destination addresses. address range filter. ═══ Filter offset ═══ In Filter offset, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the byte offset in the medium access control (MAC) information field of the 2-byte value to be compared against the filter ranges. If the value of the 2-byte field is outside both sets of ranges the frame is discarded. The range is 0-100. The default is 0. ═══ Range 1 low ═══ In Range 1 low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary value (0-FFFF) that is the low end of range 1. The default is 0. If the 2 bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are less than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded). ═══ Range 1 high ═══ In Range 1 high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary value (0-FFFF) that is the high end of range 1. The default is 0. If the 2 bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are greater than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded). ═══ Range 2 low ═══ In Range 2 low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary value (0ndash.FFFF) that is the low end of range 2. The default is 0. If the 2 bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are less than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded). ═══ Range 2 high ═══ In Range 2 high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary value (0-FFFF) that is the high end of range 2. The default is 0. If the 2 bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are greater than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded). ═══ 153. Forwarding Parameters ═══ To view and change the spanning-tree parameters, select Forwarding Parameters, on the Configuration Parameters window. The spanning-tree protocol is used by Token-Ring segments for single-route broadcast messages that are used in the route-discovery process. Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 LANs also use the protocol to allow only one of two or more parallel bridges to forward frames. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Bridge maximum age The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the MAX Age parameter of the bridge when it is the root or is attempting to become the root. Bridge hello time The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the minimum time interval for the bridge to send bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) when it is the root or is attempting to become the root. Bridge forward delay The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the time that the root bridge or the bridge that is attempting to become the root bridge spends in the learning state or the listening state. Bridge priority The spanning-tree parameter that defines the bridge priority within the spanning-tree hierarchy. LAN segment type The type of port defined by the port identifier. Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer. LAN segment number The number of the LAN segment that is connected to the bridge port. Port priority A spanning-tree parameter that defines the port priority of the identified port. Path cost The spanning-tree parameter that defines the contributed cost of the identified port to the total path cost to the root bridge. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a field. This pushbutton is also not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Bridge maximum age ═══ Enter the time (6-40 seconds) that defines the MAX Age parameter of the bridge when it is the root or is attempting to become the root. The default value is 20 seconds. ═══ Bridge hello time ═══ Enter the minimum interval (1-10 seconds) for the bridge to send bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) when it is the root or is attempting to become the root. The default value is 2 seconds. ═══ Bridge forward delay ═══ Enter the time (4-30 seconds) that the root bridge or the bridge attempting to become the root bridge spends in one of the following: o The listening state, while moving from the blocking state to the learning state o The learning state, while moving from the listening state to the forwarding state. The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge can operate in any of the following states: Blocking The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames and does not participate in the exchange of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Learning The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames and does not participate in the exchange of BPDUs. If the bridge is attached to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment, it updates its database with the medium access control (MAC) addresses of the stations on that segment. Listening The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames, but it does monitor the exchange of BPDUs, in case it becomes necessary for the bridge to enter the forwarding state. Forwarding The bridge forwards single-route broadcast frames and participates fully in the exchange of BPDUs. The default value is 15 seconds. ═══ Bridge priority ═══ Enter the number (0-65535) that defines the bridge priority within the spanning-tree hierarchy. The default value is 32768. ═══ Port priority ═══ Enter the number (0-255) defines the port priority of the identified port. The default value is 128. ═══ Path cost ═══ Enter the number (0-65535) that defines the contributed cost of the identified port to the total path cost to the root bridge. The default value for Token-Ring segments (4 Mbps) is 250. The default value for Token-Ring segments (16 Mbps) is 63. The default value for Ethernet segments is 100. The path cost increment is added to the value of the designated cost parameter for the root port and is used in bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted from this bridge port. Automatic single-route broadcast uses the path cost to choose the shortest parallel path between two LAN segments (the path with the lowest path cost) for the single-route broadcast path. ═══ SRTB parameters ═══ To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging parameters for the bridge, select SRTB parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. The SRTB Parameters window is displayed. These parameters apply only to the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge, which enables the connection of a Token-Ring segment with an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment. The 8209 bridge supports both the source-routing method of routing data (used in a Token-Ring environment) and the transparent-bridging method of routing data (used in an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 environment). The SRTB parameters affect the way that the bridge converts the format of data frames as it passes them from one network environment to another. ═══ 154. SRTB Parameters ═══ To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging parameters for the bridge, select SRTB parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. These parameters apply only to the IBM(T) 8209 LAN bridge, which enables the connection of a Token-Ring segment with an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment. The 8209 bridge supports both the source-routing method of routing data (used in a Token-Ring environment) and the transparent-bridging method of routing data (used in an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 environment). The SRTB parameters affect the way that the bridge converts the format of data frames as it passes them from one network environment to another. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. TCP/IP address conversion Whether Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) addresses are converted when they are passed from a Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network. Dual mode multicast conversion Whether the bridge transmits two multicast frame formats (one in Ethernet Version 2 format and one in IEEE 802.3 format) for each frame with a group or broadcast address that is forwarded from the Token-Ring Network when Automatic mode selection is enabled. Use general broadcast frames Whether the bridge forwards a frame to the Token-Ring segment as an all-routes broadcast frame when the destination address is not in the filtering database for a Token-Ring Network. Broadcast address conversion Whether the bridge converts the all-stations broadcast address in a Token-Ring Network frame to the all-stations broadcast address of an Ethernet frame. IPX support Whether bridge support for the Novell Internetwork Packet Exchange(T) (IPX(T)) protocols is enabled. Automatic mode selection Whether the bridge converts an incoming frame to a format for the outbound LAN traffic. Mode priority Whether frames being sent to CSMA/CD LANs should be converted to an Ethernet Version 2 mode or an IEEE 802.3 mode. Forward LLC traffic Whether the bridge should forward non-TCP/IP traffic from a Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet Version 2 network. Enabled SAPs for LLC traffic The service access points (SAPs) for which IEEE 802.3 logical link control (LLC) traffic is forwarded when Forward LLC traffic is enabled. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Static Entries To display the list of static entries for the selected bridge. Mapped Addresses To display the list of translated addresses for bridges that connect Token-Ring and CMSA/CD segments. Apply To accept the changed information and close the window. This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a field. This pushbutton is also not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ TCP/IP address conversion ═══ Specify whether the bit order of addresses within the information field of the TCP/IP Address Resolution Protocol/Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (ARP/RARP) command and response frames is to be reversed between a Token-Ring Network and an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network. ═══ Dual mode multicast conversion ═══ Specify whether the bridge transmits two multicast frame formats (one in Ethernet Version 2 format and one in IEEE 802.3 format) for each frame with a group or broadcast address that is forwarded from the Token-Ring Network when Automatic mode selection is enabled. ═══ Use general broadcast frames ═══ Specify whether the bridge is to forward a frame to the Token-Ring segment as an all-routes broadcast frame or a single-route broadcast frame when the destination address is not in the Token-Ring filtering database. When this function is enabled, the frames are forwarded as all-routes broadcast frames. ═══ Broadcast address conversion ═══ Specify whether the bridge converts the IBM Token-Ring Network all-stations broadcast address of X'C000 FFFF FFFF' in a frame to the Ethernet all-stations broadcast address of X'FFFF FFFF FFFF'. If Broadcast address conversion is disabled, the bridge (in its normal address conversion) converts the IBM Token-Ring Network all-stations broadcast address of X'C000 FFFF FFFF' in a frame to the Ethernet address of X'0300 FFFF FFFF' (which is not an all-stations broadcast address). Disable this function when several bridges are connected to the same Ethernet LAN segment in a backbone configuration. ═══ IPX support ═══ Specify whether support for the Novell Internetwork Packet Exchange(T) (IPX(T)) protocols is enabled. IPX support enables the transfer of frames in the correct format, through an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge that contains an Ethernet attachment module, to and from stations that use NetWare(T) with IPX protocols for communication with each other. IPX support also provides access protocol conversion and data-frame-format conversion for communication across an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge. ═══ Automatic mode selection ═══ Specify whether the bridge converts the incoming frames to a format suitable for the outbound LAN traffic. For conversions from a Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network, when the destination type is unknown, the bridge performs the conversion based on the Mode priority setting. If Automatic mode selection is disabled, all frames are converted according to the Mode priority setting. ═══ Mode priority ═══ Specify the mode for frame conversions from a Token-Ring segment to either an Ethernet segment or an IEEE 802.3 segment. ═══ Forward LLC traffic ═══ Specify whether the bridge forwards non-TCP/IP traffic from a Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet Version 2 network, as supported by IBM OS/2 and AIX(T). If Forward LLC traffic is disabled, the bridge will not forward these frames. ═══ Enabled SAPs for LLC traffic ═══ Specify the service access points (SAPs) for which IEEE 802.3 logical link control (LLC) traffic is forwarded when the Forward LLC traffic field is set to Yes. The following default SAPs apply to Ethernet Version 2 traffic only: 00 Null SAP that the LAN Network Manager program uses when linking to bridges and monitoring adapters 04 SNA SAP 08 SNA SAP F0 NETBIOS SAP In addition, to forward frames across an 8209 bridge, the LAN Network Manager program requires that the following SAPs be enabled: F4 LAN Network Manager F2 Managing Process D4 LAN Station Manager Resource Management FC Remote Program Update (RPU) Discovery F8 Remote Program Update (RPU) Loader Process 02 Heterogeneous LAN Management (HLM) ═══ 155. Static Entries ═══ To display the pre-defined address entries in the transparent-bridging table, select Static Entries, on the SRTB Parameters window. These entries are retrieved from the bridge and displayed in the list. Each entry consists of the medium access control (MAC) address or the functional address of a station on the local or remote Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 segment. Only a message frame with a destination address that is not in this table is passed by the bridge to the Token-Ring segment. If the destination address is in the table, the frame is discarded. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Current number of static entries The current number of static entries that are stored in the filtering database of the bridge. Maximum number of static entries The maximum number of static entries for single-route transparent bridging that the filtering database for the bridge can accommodate. Static entries The list of addresses in the static filtering database for the bridge. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort by To select the sort criteria by which the static entries are displayed. This pushbutton is not available if the static entries list is empty. Add To add static entries to the transparent-bridging table in the bridge. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Find To enter an address or name to locate in the list. When it is found, the entry is highlighted in the list. All entries highlighted in the list are selected unless you deselect them. If the search fails, an error message is displayed. This pushbutton is not available if the static entries list is empty. Delete To delete a selected entry from the transparent-bridging table. You can select and delete several entries at once. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program or if the static entries list is empty. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 156. Sort Static Entries ═══ To select the sort criteria by which the pre-defined entries in the transparent-bridging table are displayed, select Sort by, on the Static Entries window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Sort by The criteria by which the entries are sorted. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close the window and sort the entries on the Static Entries window by the specified criteria. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Sort by ═══ Specify the criteria by which the entries are to be sorted. Name Sort the static entries list by the adapter name. Any adapter address with no name is listed after addresses with names. Address Sort the static entries list by the adapter address. ═══ 157. Add Static Entry ═══ To add a name or address to the list of entries in the transparent-bridging table, select Add, on the Static Entries window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Static address or name The adapter address or name to be added to the bridge's static address list. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To add the adapter address or name to the transparent-bridging table in the bridge. The Add Static Entry window remains open, allowing you to add another entry. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Static address or name ═══ Enter the hexadecimal address or symbolic name of the adapter that you want to add to the static address list for the bridge. ═══ 158. Find Static Entry ═══ To specify an entry that you want to locate, select Find, on the Static Entries window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Static address or name The adapter address or name that you want to locate. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To locate the static entry. If found, the entry is highlighted and selected in the Static Entries window. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Static address or name ═══ Enter the hexadecimal address or symbolic name of the adapter that you want to locate in the list. ═══ 159. Mapped Addresses ═══ To display the list of translated addresses for bridges that connect Token-Ring and carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) segments, select Mapped Addresses, on the SRTB Parameters window. Some types of bridges that connect Token-Ring and CSMA/CD LAN segments, such as the 8209 LAN Bridge, can maintain, in memory, a database of translated destination addresses for each port. If the destination address of a logical link control (LLC) frame is in the database of the inbound port, the address is changed to the corresponding translated address before the frame is forwarded. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Current number of mapped addresses entries The current number of address-translation entries. Maximum number of mapped addresses entries The maximum number of address-translation entries that the bridge can store in its database table. Mapped addresses The current list of address translations that are stored in the bridge's database table. The adapter address and name are displayed for the corresponding Token-Ring and Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segments. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort by To select sort criteria by which the mapped addresses are displayed. This pushbutton is not available if the mapped-addresses list is empty. Add To add address pairs to the mapped address database for the bridge. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Find To enter the addresses or names of the matched pair to locate in the list. This pushbutton is not available if the mapped-addresses list is empty. Delete To delete a selected entry from the mapped-address database for the bridge. You can select and delete more than one entry at a time. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program or if the mapped-addresses list is empty. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 160. Sort Mapped Addresses ═══ To select sort criteria by which the mapped addresses are displayed, select Sort by, on the Mapped Addresses window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Sort by The criteria by which the entries are to be sorted. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close the window and sort the entries on the Static Entries window by the specified criteria. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Sort by ═══ Specify the criteria by which the entries are to be sorted. Token-Ring name Sort the list of address pairs by the Token-Ring adapter name. Token-Ring address Sort the list of address pairs by the Token-Ring adapter address. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 name Sort the list of address pairs by the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter name. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address Sort the list of address pairs by the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter address. ═══ 161. Add Mapped Addresses ═══ To add address pairs to the bridge's mapped-address database, select Add, on the Mapped Addresses window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Token-Ring address or name The address or name of the adapter on the Token-Ring segment. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name The address or name of the adapter on the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To add the pair of adapter addresses or names to the mapped-address database in the bridge. The Add Mapped Addresses window remains open, allowing you to add another entry. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program or if the maximum number of mapped addresses has been reached. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Token-Ring address or name ═══ Enter the address or the name of the Token-ring adapter that you want to map to a corresponding Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter address or name in the bridge's mapped-address database. ═══ Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name ═══ Enter the address or name of the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter that you want to map to a corresponding Token-Ring adapter address or name in the bridge's mapped-address database. ═══ 162. Find Mapped Addresses ═══ To specify a pair of mapped addresses that you want to locate, select Find, on the Mapped Addresses window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Token-Ring address or name The address or name of the Token-Ring adapter. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name The address or name of the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To locate the pair of mapped address. If it is found, the entry is highlighted and selected in the Mapped Addresses window. If no match is found, a message is displayed and the window remains open. All entries highlighted in the list are selected unless you deselect them. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Token-Ring address or name ═══ Enter the address or the name of the Token-Ring adapter for the mapped-address pair that you want to locate. ═══ Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name ═══ Enter the hexadecimal address or the symbolic name of the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter for the mapped-address pair that you want to locate. ═══ Reporting link parameters ═══ To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager programs linked to the bridge and to change their reporting link passwords, select Reporting link parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. The Reporting Link Parameters window is displayed. ═══ 163. Reporting Link Parameters ═══ To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager programs linked to the bridge and to change their reporting link passwords, select Reporting link parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. The controlling LAN Network Manager program uses reporting link 0. Reporting links 1, 2, and 3 are used by observing LAN Network Manager programs. If you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program, you can change the passwords of any of the links. If you change a reporting link password, also update the password at all of the LAN Network Manager programs that use the affected reporting link. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it changes the password at the bridge. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name of the selected bridge. LNM address/name The adapter address and name (if defined) of the LAN Network Manager program that is currently using that link. Password The password for that reporting link of the bridge. The password is not displayed. To change a password, type the new password for the reporting link. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To set any new passwords that you entered. This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a field. This pushbutton is also not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Password ═══ Enter the password (6-8 characters) for the reporting link. The default password for the LAN Network Manager program and for the bridges is 00000000. To reset a password that has been modified, enter 00000000. ═══ Performance data ═══ To display performance data for the bridge, including the number of frames forwarded, the number of frames not forwarded, and the reasons why the bridge did not forward them, select Performance data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. The Performance Data window appears. ═══ 164. Performance Data ═══ To display performance data for the bridge, including the number of frames forwarded, the number of frames not forwarded, and the reasons why the bridge did not forward them, select Performance data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window. You can also view changes in performance data and set the performance notification interval and frames lost threshold. If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only the Display mode field. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name of the selected bridge. Date The date that the performance data was gathered. Time The time that the performance data was gathered. Performance notification interval for controlling LAN Manager The number of whole minutes that pass before the bridge sends performance counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program. Percent frames lost threshold The point at which the bridge sends an alert to the LAN Network Manager program to report excessive frames lost. The threshold is frames lost per 10000, expressed as a percentage. Display mode Whether the information that is displayed when you select the Refresh pushbutton is based on the bridge totals or on changes in the data since you last refreshed this window. Time elapsed The time that has elapsed since the performance data was last refreshed. This field applies only if you select Delta in the Display mode field. LAN type Either Token-Ring, CSMA/CD, or Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN segment The hexadecimal segment numbers (3 digits) of the two LAN segments connected to the bridge. For frame forwarded values, it also contains: Broadcast frames The number of broadcast and single-route broadcast frames that have passed through this bridge. Broadcast bytes The number of broadcast and single-route broadcast bytes that have passed through this bridge. Non-broadcast frames The number of frames that were directed to a specific address on a specific LAN segment across specific bridges and that have passed through this bridge. Non-broadcast bytes The number of bytes that were directed to a specific address on a specific LAN segment across specific bridges and that have passed through this bridge. For frames not forwarded, it also contains: Target LAN segment inoperative The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge or through this adapter because of a beaconing adapter, continuous carrier, no carrier, or 16 consecutive collisions on the LAN segment of the other bridge adapter. Adapter congestion The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge because of heavy traffic on this bridge adapter. Other reasons The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge because of problems with the frames, such as invalid routing information or an invalid frame size. Telecommunications link error The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge because of problems with the telecommunications link between two bridges. This is applicable only to the IBM(T) Token-Ring Network Bridge Program, Version 2.1 and Version 2.2 and above that use the remote bridge function. This field is greyed for bridges that do not support a telecommunications link. For more information about performance counters, see the Local Area Network Administrator's Guide. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Apply To accept the changed information and close the window. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program. Refresh To redisplay the window with updated total or delta counters. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Ethernet To display Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port counters. This pushbutton is not available if the bridge is not an IBM(T) 8209 LAN Bridge. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Performance notification interval ═══ Enter the number of minutes (0-99) that can pass before the bridge sends performance-counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program. If you specify a frequency of 0, the bridge does not send updates to the LAN Network Manager program. The LAN Network Manager program saves the performance-counter values in the bridge performance table in the database. You can analyze this data to perform such tasks as tracking peaks and trends, balancing traffic flow and workload, and isolating problems. ═══ Percent frames lost threshold ═══ Enter the number (in the format xx.xx) that indicates the threshold at which the bridge sends an alert to the LAN Network Manager program to report excessive frames lost. The threshold is frames lost per 10000, expressed as a percentage. For example, to request a threshold of 5%, enter 05.00; to request 4.5%, enter 04.50. The recommended threshold is 3%. Frames can be lost due to: o Inoperable LAN segments o Adapter congestion. ═══ Display mode ═══ Specify whether you want to display information that is based on the bridge totals (Total) or on changes in the data since you last refreshed this window (Delta). Each time you open the Performance Data window, the Display mode field defaults to Total. You can change the Display mode field to Delta, but this change is applicable only while the window remains open. Therefore, selecting Delta does not cause the Apply pushbutton to become available. If you select Delta, select the Refresh pushbutton each time that you want to view updated counter information. ═══ 165. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Counters ═══ To display Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port counters, select Ethernet, on the Performance Data window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge name The user-defined name that identifies the bridge. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 collisions The number of Ethernet collisions that were detected since the last report. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 late collisions The number of Ethernet late collisions that were detected since the last report. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CRC errors The number of Ethernet cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors that were detected since the last report. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 framing errors The number of Ethernet framing errors that were detected since the last report. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Refresh To redisplay the window with any updated information. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 166. Station Profile ═══ To display status information about a station, select the station, and then select one of the following: o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Profile pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. If the station you selected is not active, or if the query is unsuccessful, this window includes information available from the last access to the specified station. The LAN Network Manager program displays a message at the top of the window to indicate that the data was retrieved from the database rather than from the station itself. This window contains the following information for the selected station: Adapter address/name The hexadecimal address of the adapter and its name. LAN segment number The number that the LAN Network Manager program uses to indicate the LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. LAN segment type Whether the segment is part of a Token-Ring Network or a PC Network(T). Adapter options The microcode options on the adapter. Possible values for this field are blanks, indicating that there are no options, and Ring Utilization. NAUN address/name The adapter address and the name of the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN). This field is used for Token-Ring Networks only. Microcode level The version of microcode in the adapter. Universal address The universally administered address. The universal address is permanently encoded in ROM in the adapter at the time of manufacture. This field might be blank. Group address An address that represents the group of logically related adapters to which this adapter belongs. A program can send a single message to a group address. All the adapters with that group address receive the message. Functional address/names An address that indicates the adapter's functions, such as active monitor or ring error monitor. An adapter can have up to 31 functional addresses. Monitored Whether the adapter is monitored. Monitoring means that the LAN Network Manager program generates an alert whenever the adapter is not active on the network. Tracing Authorized Whether the adapter is authorized to trace. Time authorized The times of day that the adapter is authorized to be on the network. Days authorized The days the adapter is authorized to be on the network. Comments Comments about this adapter. This information is entered on the Station Definition window. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information about the station and remove the station from the network. ═══ Station Profile Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Station Profile window, to use the following functions: PC Network counter information To view performance-counter information for PC Network(T) adapters. This option is not available if the adapter is not connected to a PC Network. Workstation information To view workstation information, such as the workstation location, for the selected adapter. This information is supplied by the LAN Station Manager program. This option is not available if the LAN Station Manager program is not installed in the workstation. Attachment data To display information about how the selected adapter is physically attached to the network. This option is available only if the station is running the LAN Station Manager program or is attached to a Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Refresh To redisplay the window with any updated information. ═══ PC Network counter information ═══ To display counter information for a station that is attached to a PC Network(T), select PC Network counter information, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. This option is not available if the adapter is not attached to a PC Network or if the adapter is not responding. The counters are reset to zero every minute and each time the adapter is queried. The PC Network Counter Information window is displayed. ═══ 167. PC Network Counter Information ═══ To display counter information for a station that is attached to a PC Network(T), select PC Network counter information, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. This option is not available if the adapter is not attached to a PC Network or if the adapter is not responding. The counters are reset to zero every minute and each time the adapter is queried. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The hexadecimal address (12 digits) and the symbolic name (1-16 characters) of the adapter. LAN segment The hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. LAN segment type The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached and the transmission speed in megabits per second (Mbps). The LAN segment is CSMA/CD for this segment. CRC errors The number of properly aligned frames received with a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error. Alignment errors The number of frames that were received with a CRC error. When excessive or missing bits occur during the reception of a frame, the frame is misaligned. Collisions The number of collisions that were registered for the adapter. When a frame from a transmitting adapter encounters any other signal in its path (another frame, noise, or another type of signal), the adapter stops transmitting, and a collision is registered. Aborted transmissions The number of unsuccessful transmissions that were registered by the adapter. The adapter registers an unsuccessful transmission if transmission stops because of either of the following: o The control signal in the adapter is lost. o The system is not supplying data for transmission. Packets sent The number of frames that were successfully transmitted by the adapter. Packets received The number of frames that were successfully received by the adapter. Resource errors The number of frames that were discarded because the system could not accept frames as fast as the adapter received them. ═══ Remove adapter ═══ Warning: Use caution when removing an adapter from the network. For example, removing a bridge adapter can have an adverse effect on the network. Review the functional address of the adapter to determine if it is a bridge. To remove an adapter from the network, do one of the following: o Select the Remove pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window. o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Remove Adapter window is displayed. This option is available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Removal of an adapter requires removal support in the station that is to be removed. For example, the adapters in the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) do not support the force remove frame; therefore, a remove request for adapters in a CAU would fail. Also, some software has built-in automatic recovery. If the end station application detects that the adapter has closed, it issues an open adapter command. ═══ 168. Remove Adapter ═══ Warning: Use caution when removing an adapter from the network. For example, removing a bridge adapter can have an adverse effect on the network. Review the functional address of the adapter to determine if it is a bridge. To remove an adapter from the network, do one of the following: o Select the Remove pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window. o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Remove Adapter window is displayed. Removal of an adapter requires removal support in the station that is to be removed. For example, the adapters in the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) do not support the force remove frame; therefore, a remove request for adapters in a CAU would fail. Also, some software has built-in automatic recovery. If the application in the end station detects that the adapter has closed, it issues an open adapter command. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The hexadecimal address (12 digits) and the symbolic name (1-16 characters), if defined, that identifies the adapter. LAN segment number The hexadecimal number (3 digits) that identifies the LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. LAN segment type The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. The LAN type can be either Token-Ring Network or PC Network(T). Adapter options Possible values are blanks or Ring Utilization. NAUN address/name The adapter address and name (if defined) of the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN). Microcode level The level of microcode for the selected adapter. Universal address The burned-in address for the selected adapter, which is issued at the time of manufacture. Group address The address that represents the group of logically related adapters to which the adapter belongs. If an application sends a single message to a group address, all adapters with that group address receive the message. Functional address/names An address that indicates the adapter's functions, such as active monitor or ring error monitor. An adapter can have up to 31 functional addresses. The list box contains the names of the functions associated with the functional address for the adapter. Scroll through the list to view the functions in the list box. Monitored Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors this station as a critical resource. This is defined on the Station Definition window. Tracing authorized Whether this adapter is authorized to gather trace information. This is defined on the Station Definition window. Time authorized The times of day that this adapter is authorized to be on the network. This is defined on the Station Definition window. Days authorized The days this adapter is allowed on the network, as defined on the Station Definition window. Comments User comments entered on the Station Definition window. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Remove To remove this adapter. This pushbutton is not available if you are not using a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Personal Computer information ═══ To display current workstation information, which is maintained at the workstation by the LAN Station Manager program, select Personal Computer information, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If there is no response to this query and the current information is unavailable, the LAN Network Manager program retrieves the most recent workstation information from its own database. The workstation information is stored in the LAN Network Manager database only if you specify the Personal computer information option on the LAN Station Manager Options window. This option is not available if the selected station does not have the LAN Station Manager installed. The Workstation Information window appears. ═══ 169. Personal Computer Information ═══ To display and change information about the personal computer, its attached devices, and its LAN adapters, select Personal Computer information, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. This information is maintained at the workstation by the LAN Station Manager program. If there is no response to this query and the current information is unavailable, the LAN Network Manager program retrieves the most recent workstation information from its own database. The workstation information is stored in the LAN Network Manager database only if you specify the Personal computer information option on the LAN Station Manager Options window. This option is not available if the selected station does not have the LAN Station Manager installed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter that is attached to the selected personal computer. User-defined data Additional information about the selected personal computer. LAN Station Manager Program version The version of the LAN Station Manager program running in the selected personal computer. Operating system The type and version of operating system (OS/2(T) or DOS) running in the selected personal computer. Workstation location The physical location of the selected personal computer. Workstation type Information (the model name and number) about the type of personal computer selected. Workstation serial number The serial number that is imprinted on the selected personal computer. Display type The type of display that is attached to the selected personal computer. Display serial number The serial number that is imprinted on the display that is attached to the selected personal computer. Printer type The type of printer that is attached to the selected personal computer. Printer serial number The serial number that is imprinted on the printer that is attached to the selected personal computer. Keyboard type The type of keyboard that is attached to the selected personal computer. Keyboard serial number The serial number that is imprinted on the keyboard that is attached to the selected personal computer. Device 1/Device 2 type The type of each additional device that is attached to the selected personal computer. The device can be a mouse, a modem, a plotter, or a second display, keyboard, or printer. Device 1/Device 2 serial number The serial number that is imprinted on each device that is attached to the selected personal computer. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Apply To accept the changed information. This window remains open so that you can access other workstation information. Reset To return any values to their initial settings. Disk drives To display a list of disk drives that are attached to the selected personal computer. Adapter list To display a list of the Micro Channel(T) adapters that are attached to the selected personal computer. Memory To display the base, extended, and expanded memory capacity of the selected personal computer. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ User-defined data ═══ Enter any additional information about the selected personal computer. Ask your network administrator what to enter here. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Workstation location ═══ Enter the physical location, for example, the building and the room number, of the selected personal computer. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Workstation serial number ═══ Enter the serial number of the selected personal computer. This number is imprinted on the personal computer. You can enter up to 15 characters, including blanks. ═══ Display type ═══ Enter the type of display that is attached to the selected personal computer. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Display serial number ═══ Enter the serial number of the display that is attached to the selected personal computer. This number is imprinted on the display. You can enter up to 15 characters, including blanks. ═══ Printer type ═══ Enter the type of printer that is attached to the selected personal computer. For example, the type can be the manufacturer, the model, or the capabilities of the printer (such as laser printing). You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Printer serial number ═══ Enter the serial number of the printer that is attached to the selected personal computer. This number is imprinted on the printer. You can enter up to 15 characters, including blanks. ═══ Keyboard type ═══ Enter the type of keyboard that is attached to the selected personal computer. For example, the type can be the manufacturer and any special characteristics, such as support for non-English characters. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Keyboard serial number ═══ Enter the serial number of the keyboard that is attached to the selected personal computer. This number is imprinted on the keyboard. You can enter up to 15 characters, including blanks. ═══ Device 1/Device 2 type ═══ Enter the type of up to two additional devices that are attached to the selected personal computer. For example, the type can be the name of the manufacturer and the model of the device. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ Device 1/Device 2 serial number ═══ Enter the serial number of each device that is attached to the selected personal computer. This serial number is imprinted on the device. You can enter up to 15 characters, including blanks. ═══ 170. Disk List ═══ To display a list of disk drives that are configured for the personal computer and the capacity of each, select Disk drives, on the Personal Computer Information window. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter attached to the selected personal computer. Disk drive The hard storage disks and the diskette drives attached to the selected personal computer. Capacity The capacity, in MB (MB=1048576 bytes), of the disk drives that are attached to the selected personal computer. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 171. Adapter List ═══ To display a list of the Micro Channel(T) adapters that are installed in the selected personal computer, select Adapter list, on the Personal Computer Information window. Any non-Micro Channel adapters in the personal computer are not listed. This window contains the following fields for workstation adapters: Adapter ID The Programmable Option Select (POS) identifier of the adapter. Description The function of the adapter in the workstation, such as a memory-expansion board or a display adapter card. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 172. Memory ═══ To display information about the memory that is installed in the personal computer, select Memory, on the Personal Computer Information window. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and name of the adapter attached to the personal computer. The address can be the universally administered address that is encoded in the adapter or the locally administered address. Ask your network administrator. ROM date The date of the Read-Only Memory (ROM) Basic Input-Output System (BIOS). Base memory The amount of base memory, in KB (KB=1024 bytes), that is installed or configured at the workstation. Extended memory The amount of extended memory that is installed or configured at the workstation. This value applies only to DOS workstations. Expanded memory The amount of expanded memory that is installed or configured at the workstation. This value applies only to DOS workstations. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Attachment data ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. One of the following windows is displayed, depending upon the type of LAN to which the adapter is attached. o Attachment Data - Token-Ring o Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU o Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data o Attachment Data - PC Network Broadband o Attachment Data - PC Network Baseband ═══ 173. Attachment Data - Token-Ring ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected adapter is attached to a Token-Ring Network, the Attachment Data - Token-Ring window is displayed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter. Adapter number The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate). Wall faceplate label For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems, the information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is connected. Access unit label The user-defined label that identifies the access unit to which the adapter is connected. Lobe receptacle number The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is attached. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 174. Wall faceplate label ═══ For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems, specify the information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is connected. The label usually contains information about the cable between the faceplate and the wiring closet. You can specify up to 40 characters, including blanks. ═══ 175. Access unit label ═══ Specify the user-defined label (4 characters) that identifies the access unit to which the adapter is connected. The access unit can be an IBM Token-Ring Network Multistation Access Unit or an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). ═══ 176. Lobe receptacle number ═══ Specify the number (1-20) of the lobe receptacle to which this station is attached. This parameter can be configured by the LAN Station Manager operator. However, if this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted (and the user-defined value is written over). ═══ 177. Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected adapter is attached to Token-Ring Network on a Controlled Access Unit (CAU), the Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU window is displayed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter. Adapter number The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate). Wall faceplate label For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems, the information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is connected. Access unit label The user-defined label that identifies the access unit to which the adapter is connected. Lobe receptacle number The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is attached. This parameter can be configured by the LAN Station Manager operator. However, if this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted (and the user-defined value is written over). CAU ID The identifier of the access unit to which the adapter is connected. If this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted. If the station is no longer attached to the CAU and this parameter was not reset by the LAN Station Manager operator, you can reset this parameter. Lobe attachment module ID The number of the lobe attachment module of the CAU to which this station is attached. If this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted. If the station is no longer attached to the CAU and this parameter was not reset by the LAN Station Manager operator, you can reset this parameter. CAU registered Whether this LAN Network Manager program is also registered with the CAU identified in the field that is labeled Access unit ID. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 178. Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected adapter does not have the LAN Station Manager program installed and either is attached to a Controlled Access Unit (CAU) or has a CAU ID specified in its definition, the Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data window is displayed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter. CAU ID The identifier of the access unit to which the adapter is connected. This parameter is set by the CAU to which the station is attached each time the station is restarted. Lobe attachment module number The number of the lobe attachment module of the CAU to which this station is attached. This parameter is set by the CAU each time the station is restarted. Lobe receptacle number The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is attached. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Refresh To display the window with any updated information. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 179. Attachment Data - PC Network Broadband ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected adapter is attached to a broadband PC Network(T), the Attachment Data - PC Network Broadband is displayed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter. Adapter number The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate). Cable ID The user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the adapter to the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter. Adapter frequency The transmission and reception frequencies at which the adapter communicates. Splitter unit ID The user-defined identifier of the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter to which the adapter is connected. Splitter TAP number The user-defined number of the splitter-tap outlet to which the adapter is connected. Distribution leg The user-defined number of the cable that connects the translator unit to the splitter to which the adapter is connected. Translator unit ID The user-defined number of the translator unit in the network to which the adapter is connected. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 180. Cable ID ═══ Specify the user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the adapter to the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter. ═══ 181. Adapter frequency ═══ Specify the transmission and reception frequencies at which the adapter communicates. ═══ 182. Splitter unit ID ═══ Specify the user-defined identifier of the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 183. Splitter TAP number ═══ Specify the user-defined number of the splitter-tap outlet to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 184. Distribution leg ═══ Specify the user-defined number of the cable that connects the translator unit to the splitter to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 185. Translator unit ID ═══ Specify the user-defined number of the translator unit in the network to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 186. Attachment Data - PC Network Baseband ═══ To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected adapter is attached to a baseband PC Network(T), the Attachment Data - PC Network Baseband is displayed. This window contains the following fields: Adapter address/name The address and the name of the adapter. Adapter number The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate). Cable ID The user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the adapter to the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter. Extender unit ID The user-defined number of the IBM(T) PC Network Baseband Extender to which the adapter is connected. Extender port number The number of the in-port on the Baseband Extender to which the adapter is connected. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 187. Extender unit ID ═══ Specify the user-defined identifier of the IBM PC Network Baseband Extender to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 188. Extender port number ═══ Specify the number of the in-port on the Baseband Extender to which the adapter is connected. ═══ 189. Controlled Access Unit Profile ═══ To display status information about an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the CAU, and then select one of the following: o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Profile pushbutton, on the CAU Information/Status window o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. If the CAU you selected is not active, or if the query is not successful, the status displayed in this window includes the information available from the last access to that CAU. A message appears at the top of the window to indicate that the data was retrieved from the database. This window contains the following fields: CAU ID The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify a CAU. LAN segment The 3-digit hexadecimal number that represents the LAN segment to which the CAU is attached. Microcode level The level of microcode of the CAU, indicated by: o Microcode level o Remote Program Update microcode level o Microcode version number o Microcode modification number. Primary in (PI) The adapter address and symbolic name (if defined) of the primary ring adapter on the ring-in (upstream) side of the CAU. Primary out (PO) The adapter address and symbolic name (if defined) of the primary ring adapter on the ring-out (downstream) side of the CAU. Secondary adapter (S) The adapter address and the symbolic name (if defined) of the secondary ring adapter for the CAU. Registered Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program. Registered with The adapter address of the LAN Network Manager program with which the CAU is registered. Wrap status The current wrap status of the CAU: Normal The signal is open on the main ring path, and the backup path is being checked. Wrap RI The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the ring-in side of the CAU. Wrap RO The CAU has switched traffic from the main path to the backup path on the ring-out side of the CAU. Wrap RI/RO The CAU has removed itself from the main ring. Unknown Communication with the CAU is not possible at this time. Backup path status The current status of the backup path of the CAU: o Operational o Not operational (the ring is beaconing) o Undefined (the CAU is wrapped). Diagnostic error code The current diagnostic error code for the CAU: A1 Flash checksum error A2 RPU loader not found A3 RPU loader file not found Other error codes Read the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit Service Guide (SY27-0326) for an explanation of other error codes. Attachment status The status for each module attached to the CAU: o Enabled o Disabled o Not connected. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information about the lobe modules. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Unit Profile window, to use the following functions: Wrap display/change To display and change the wrap status of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Module x details To display a list of adapters attached to the individual lobes of the selected CAU. Reset CAU To reset the selected CAU. Refresh To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Profile window with any updated information. ═══ Controlled Access Unit wrap data ═══ Warning: Changing the wrap state of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) might disrupt ring operation or host communication with some devices. If you change the wrap state and an error condition exists on the segment that prevents the CAU from running effectively under the new wrap state, the change will not take effect until the error is removed. To display or change the wrap condition of the selected CAU, select Wrap display/change on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window. The Controlled Access Unit Wrap Data window is displayed. This choice is not available if an error occurred while obtaining the profile, if the LAN Network Manager program is running in limited mode, or if the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 190. Controlled Access Unit Wrap Data ═══ Warning: Changing the wrap state of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) might disrupt ring operation or host communication with some devices. If you change the wrap state and an error condition exists on the segment that prevents the CAU from running effectively under the new wrap state, the change will not take effect until the error is removed. To display or change the wrap condition of the selected CAU, select Wrap display/change on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window. If the CAU status is normal, the Error Data fields for RI and RO are blank, and the information for the backup segment is displayed. If the status is not normal, the Error Data fields contain information. This window contains the following fields: CAU ID The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify the CAU. LAN segment The 3-digit number that represents the LAN segment to which the CAU is attached. Registered Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program. Registered with The adapter address of the LAN Network Manager program with which the CAU is registered. Wrap status The current wrap status of the CAU. Wraps forced by LAN Network Manager The wrap status to be forced by the LAN Network Manager. Error data The error data for ring in, ring out, or internal or backup ring. o The adapter address and name of the beaconing station. o The adapter address and name of the NAUN station for the beaconing station. o The beacon type. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Wrap To change the wrap state of the CAU as specified in the Wraps forced by LAN Network Manager field. Refresh To redisplay the window with any updated information. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Wraps forced by LAN Network Manager ═══ To change the wrap state of the CAU, select one of the following: Normal Open the main ring path and check the backup path. Wrap RI Switch traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the RI side. Wrap RO Switch traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the RO side. Wrap RI/RO Remove the CAU from the main ring and form an internal ring. ═══ Lobe Attachment Module x Details ═══ To display a list of the adapters attached to the attachment module, select Module x details on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window, where x is the number of the attachment module (1-4), The Lobe Attachment Module x Details window is displayed. This choice is not available if an error occurred while obtaining the profile, if the LAN Network Manager program is running in limited mode, or if the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 191. Lobe Attachment Module x Details ═══ To display a list of the adapters attached to the attachment module, select Module x details on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window, where x is the number of the attachment module (1-4), This window contains the following fields: CAU ID The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). LAN segment The 3-digit number that represents the LAN segment to which the CAU is attached. Registered Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program. Attachment module number The number (1-4) of the selected attachment module. Lobe/address mismatch Whether there is a mismatch between the lobe number and the address. If the Lobe/address mismatch field is Yes, then the CAU is unable to match at least one lobe and adapter address. Those lobes for which there is a mismatch contain question marks in the address field. One cause of this condition is the presence of a trace tool on a lobe. If the Lobe/address mismatch field is No and one of the address fields contains question marks, then the CAU is in the process of matching addresses to lobes. Wait 10 seconds then select Refresh. Continue to refresh until a valid address appears or until the Lobe/address mismatch field is Yes. Attachment module status Whether the attachment module is enabled or disabled. If there is a mismatch between the lobe and address, the last known correct data is displayed. Lobe receptacle information A scrollable window that contains the following for each lobe receptacle: o The number of the lobe receptacle. o The status of the lobe receptacle. o The address and name of the adapter attached to the lobe receptacle. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information about the lobe modules. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window, to use the following functions: Enable lobe receptacle To enable the selected lobes. Disable lobe receptacle To disable the selected lobes. Show/Change lobe definition To display or change the definition of the IBM(T) 8203 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) lobe. Enable attachment module To enable the selected attachment module. Disable attachment module To disable the selected attachment module. Refresh To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window with any updated information. ═══ Enable lobe receptacle ═══ To enable one or more lobe receptacles, select the receptacles from the list in the scrollable window, and then select Enable lobe receptacle, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. Enabling the lobe allows an adapter to insert on it. You cannot enable a lobe on a CAU if the CAU is not registered to your LAN Network Manager program. If the CAU loses power, this setting will not be maintained. ═══ Disable lobe receptacle ═══ Warning: Changing module status can disrupt normal network activity. To disable one or more lobe receptacles, select the receptacles from the list in the scrollable window, and then select Disable lobe receptacle, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. Disabling the lobe prevents adapters from inserting on it. LAN Network Manager prompts you to confirm your decision before it disables the lobe. You cannot disable a lobe on a CAU if the CAU is not registered to your LAN Network Manager program. If the CAU loses power, this setting will not be maintained. ═══ Enable attachment module ═══ To enable the selected attachment module, select Enable attachment module, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. This option is not available of the attachment module is already enabled or if the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Disable attachment module ═══ To disable the selected attachment module, select Disable attachment module, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. This option is not available of the attachment module is already disabled or if the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Refresh ═══ To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window with any updated information, select Refresh, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. ═══ Reset ═══ Warning: Resetting the CAU can disrupt normal network activity. To reset the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Reset, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window. This option is not available if an error occurred while the LAN Network Manager program was obtaining the profile, if the LAN Network Manager program is running in limited mode, or if the LAN Network Manager program is not registered with the CAU. ═══ Refresh ═══ To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Profile window with any updated information, select Refresh, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window. ═══ Link bridge ═══ To attempt to link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the following: o Link bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Link pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window o Link, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The LAN Network Manager program displays a message that indicates success or failure. ═══ 192. Link Bridge ═══ To attempt to link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the following: o Link bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Link pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window o Link, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. If you have not defined the bridge to link automatically, or if you have set automatic bridge link function to Inactive, you can use this function to link to the bridge. This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating in limited mode, or if no bridge has been selected. Any selected objects that are not bridges are ignored, and only the selected unlinked bridges are linked. To manage remote segments, the LAN Network Manager program must be linked to the remote bridges. This window contains the following field: Automatic bridge link Whether the LAN Network Manager program should automatically attempt to re-establish the link, if the link is lost. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Link To attempt to link to the selected bridge. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Unlink bridge ═══ To disable a link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the following: o Unlink bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Unlink pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window o Unlink, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. ═══ 193. Unlink Bridge ═══ To disable a link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the following: o Unlink bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu o The Unlink pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window o Unlink, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. If you have defined the bridge to link automatically, you can use this function to disable the automatic bridge link. This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating in limited mode, or if no linked bridge has been selected. Any selected objects that are not bridges are ignored, and only the selected linked bridges are unlinked. This window contains the following field: Automatic bridge link, Whether the LAN Network Manager program should automatically attempt to re-establish the link, if the link is lost. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Unlink To unlink from the selected bridge. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 194. Events ═══ Select Events to use the following functions: Display event log To display a list of the events that have been logged by this LAN Network Manager program. Dynamic event list To display a list of the latest 15 events that have been logged by this LAN Network Manager program. Event log filters To define the criteria by which events are filtered for logging. Set soft error reporting options To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs. This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating in limited mode. Clear event log To delete all events from the event log. ═══ Display event log ═══ To display a list of the events and alerts that have been logged by this LAN Network Manager program, select the Events pushbutton on any of the Resource Information/Status windows, or select Display event log, on the Events pull-down menu. The Event Log window appears. Alerts are displayed in red. An alert that is forwarded to the NetView(T) host is indicated by a host icon. An alert that is not forwarded to the NetView host is indicated by a lightning bolt icon. An alert that is not generated by the LAN Network Manager program (an alert that is received through the alert transport facility) is logged as a message DFIPD399 (alert transport frame received) with the time the alert was received. ═══ 195. Event Log ═══ To display a list of the events and alerts that have been logged by this LAN Network Manager program, select the Events pushbutton on any of the Resource Information/Status windows, or select Display event log, on the Events pull-down menu. This window contains the following information for each event: o Date of the event o Time of the event o Message number that is generated by the alert o Statement that explains the problem that caused the event. For certain events, the following information can be included: o Address of the adapter that is reporting the event o Name of the adapter (if defined) o Additional data (if available) o The segment that contains the adapter. The most recent event is displayed first. Alerts are displayed in red. An alert that is forwarded to the NetView(T) host is indicated by a host icon. An alert that is not forwarded to the NetView host is indicated by a lightning bolt icon. An alert that is not generated by the LAN Network Manager program (an alert that is received through the alert transport facility) is logged as a message DFIPD399 (alert transport frame received) with the time the alert was received. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display details about the event, delete selected events, and refresh the event log. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying entries of the event log. ═══ Event Log Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Event Log window, to use the following functions: Event details To display details of the selected events. Print To print the details of selected events to a file. Delete To remove the selected events from the log. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it deletes the event. ═══ Event details ═══ To display more specific information about the selected events and alerts, select one or more events, and then select Event details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. The Event Details window appears. This window displays a detailed explanation of each selected event, including the impact of that event. It also provides recommended actions to solve the problem. This option is not available if you have not selected any events. ═══ 196. Event Details ═══ To display more specific information about the selected events and alerts, select one or more events, and then select Event details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. This window contains the following information for the selected event: o Date of the event o Time of the event o Message number that is generated by the alert o Statement that explains the problem that caused the event. For certain events, the following information can be included: o Address of the adapter that is reporting the event o Name of the adapter (if defined) o Additional data (if available) o The segment that contains the adapter. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display details about events that are alerts, display the profiles of the bridge or station associated with the event, and delete the event. ═══ Event Details Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Event Details window, to use the following functions: Alert details To display more specific information about the alert. This option is not available if the selected event is not an alert. Profile To display the profile for the bridge or station that is associated with the selected event. If more than one adapter is involved in the problem, the LAN Network Manager program displays a window with a list of adapters from which to choose. Delete To delete the selected event. ═══ Alert details ═══ To display more specific information about the alert, select Alert details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window. The Alert Details window appears. This window provides information about the alert, such as a description of the alert and its probable causes. This option is not available if the selected event is not an alert. ═══ 197. Alert Details ═══ To display more specific information about the alert, select Alert details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window. This window contains the following fields: Resource name The symbolic name of the resource that is associated with this alert. Resource type The type of resource that is associated with this alert. Date The date that this alert was logged. Time The time that this alert was logged. Error type The type of error that was reported. Probable cause(s) A scrollable list of probable sources of the error. Description A general description of the alert. Text message The message number and a complete description of the problem. This information is not provided for alert transport frames (message DFIPD399). Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Recommended actions To display the recommended actions you can take to resolve this problem. Link details To display connection data about the adapter that is reporting the alert. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 198. Recommended Actions ═══ To display the actions you can take to resolve this problem, select Recommended actions, on the Alert Details window. This window displays two scrollable lists; one lists the possible causes of the event, the other lists the recommended actions. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Fail causes To display information about events that have been caused by the failure of a hardware or software component. These types of errors are generally not expected and ordinarily require that you contact service personnel for resolution. Examples of failure causes are failure of a cooling system or incorrect protocol exchange between two components in the network. This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply to this event. User causes To display information about events that have been caused by manual intervention. These are events whose causes can be fixed by the user, such as the power being off, a lack of paper, or a device that is varied off line by a user. These types of errors are normally easy to correct. This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply to this event. Inst causes To display information about events that are the result of incorrect installation or set-up of equipment. Examples of install causes are incorrect installation of a cable, a LAN configuration error, or a mismatch between a program and the hardware on which it is installed. This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply to this event. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. Follow the procedures in the window to resolve the problem. ═══ 199. Link Details ═══ To display connection data about the adapter that is reporting the alert, select Link details, on the Alert Details window. This window contains the following data: o Name of the resource that is reporting the alert o Date and time that the error was reported o Type of error reported o Address and name (if defined) of the reporting adapter o Address and name of the upstream adapter and the downstream adapter o Weight of the error o LAN segment number of the segment that is reporting the alert o Bridge ID (if the adapter generating the alert is a bridge) o Other routing information o Beacon type (if applicable). Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Profile ═══ To display the profile for the bridge or for the station that is associated with the selected event, select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window. One of the following windows appears, depending upon whether the adapter is in a bridge or a station: o Station Profile window o Bridge Profile window If there are several addresses for which a profile can be displayed, Query Profile window appears, from which you select only one address. If the adapter address exists on several LAN segments, the Adapter Segment Number window appears, from which you select only one segment. ═══ Query Profile ═══ The Query Profile window is displayed if you select Profile on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window, and there are several addresses for which a profile can be displayed. Select the adapter address for which you want to display the profile. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Adapter Segment Number ═══ The Adapter Segment Number window is displayed if you select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window, or if you select Find, on the View pull-down menu, and the adapter exists on more than one segment. Select the segment for which you want to display the profile. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and close the window. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 200. Delete ═══ To delete an event for which you displayed detailed information, select Delete, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it deletes the event. The Event Details window is then closed, and the event log is redisplayed with the remaining events. If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the dynamic event list. ═══ Print event ═══ To print the details of one or more events from the event log to an ASCII file on your hard disk, select the events, and then select Print on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. The Print Event Details window is displayed. This option is not available if you have not selected any events. ═══ Print Event Details ═══ To print the details of one or more events from the event log to an ASCII file on your hard disk, select the events, and then select Print on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. This window contains the following field: Filename The drive path and file name of the file to which you want to print the event details. Use the pushbuttons to do the following: Set To print the event details to the specified file. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Filename ═══ Specify the drive path and file name of the file to which you want to print the event details. This field can contain up to 256 characters. The default is C:\EVENTS.TXT. ═══ Delete event ═══ To delete one or more events from the event log, select the events, and then select Delete on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it deletes the events. This option is not available if you have not selected any events. If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the dynamic event list. ═══ Event Log View ═══ Select View, on the Event Log window, to use the following functions: All To display all entries in the event log. Some To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event log. Refresh To redisplay the Event Log window with any updated information from the LAN Network Manager program. If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All ═══ To display all entries in the event log, select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window. If there is a check mark beside this choice, all the events are currently displayed in the event log. ═══ Some ═══ To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event log, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window. The Some Events window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those events that meet the criteria specified on the Some Events window are displayed. ═══ 201. Some Events ═══ To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event log, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window. This window contains the following fields: Logged from this start date to this end date The month, day, and year of the starting and ending dates that define the logging period for which you want to display events. Logged from this start time to this end time The hour, minute, and second of the starting and ending times that define the logging period for which you want to display events. Alerts only Whether you want to display alerts only. With this message number The message number of the events that you want to display. For this LAN segment The number of the LAN segment for which you want to display events. Adapter address or name The address or symbolic name of the adapter for which you want to display events. Bridge name The name of the bridge for which you want to display events. Controlled Access Unit The identifier of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) for which you want to display events. Stop after this many events The number of events that you want to display. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the events list according to the specified criteria. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Clear To empty all fields. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Logged from this start date to this end date ═══ Specify the date range for the events you want to display in the event log. You can specify the date in the following ways: Start date only Displays the events that have been logged since the date you specify. End date only Displays the events that have been logged up to the date you specify. Start and end date Displays the events that have been logged between the dates you specify. The format of the date is mm/dd/yy, where: mm is the month dd is the day yy is the last two digits of the year. The format of this field is dependent on the code page that you are using. Different countries use different code pages, and the format of the date changes depending on the country in which you are using the LAN Network Manager program. For example, if you have the line CODEPAGE=850,437 in your CONFIG.SYS file, you get the United Kingdom code page, which gives a date format of dd/mm/yy. ═══ Logged from this start time to this end time ═══ Specify the time period for the events that you want to display in the event log. You can specify the time in the following ways: Start time only Displays the events that have been logged since the time you specify. End time only Displays the events that have been logged up to the time you specify. Start time and end time Displays the events that have been logged during the times you specify. The format of the time is hh/mm/ss, where: hh is the hour (in 24-hour format) mm is the minutes ss is the seconds. ═══ Alerts only ═══ Specify whether you want to display both events and alerts or to display alerts only. ═══ With this message number ═══ Specify the message number of the events that you want to display. The message number is a 3-digit number that the LAN Network Manager program adds to the prefix DFIPD to identify a specific problem that it has detected, such as a congested adapter. ═══ For this LAN segment ═══ Specify the number of the LAN segment for which you want to display events. The LAN segment number is the 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies the LAN segment. ═══ Adapter address or name ═══ Specify the address or the name of the adapter for which you want to display events. You can enter either the hexadecimal address (12 digits) or the symbolic name (1-16 characters). If you specify an adapter in this field, the Bridge name field and the Controlled Access Unit field are not available. ═══ Bridge name ═══ Specify the name of the bridge for which you want to display events. The bridge name consists of 1-8 characters in any combination of the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $, and %. If you specify a bridge name in this field, the Adapter address or name field and the Controlled Access Unit field are not available. ═══ Controlled Access Unit ═══ Specify the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) for which you want to display events. The CAU ID is the 8-digit hexadecimal number that identifies a specific CAU. If you specify a CAU ID in this field, the Adapter address or name field and the Bridge name field are not available. ═══ Stop after this many events ═══ Specify the maximum number of events (1-2000) that you want to display. ═══ Refresh ═══ To redisplay the Event Log window with any updated information from the LAN Network Manager program, select Refresh, on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window. ═══ Dynamic event list ═══ To display the 15 most recent events and alerts that were logged by this LAN Network Manager program, select Dynamic event list, on the Events pull-down menu. The Dynamic Event List window appears. ═══ 202. Dynamic Event List ═══ To display the 15 most recent events and alerts that were logged by this LAN Network Manager program, select Dynamic event list, on the Events pull-down menu. This window displays only the 15 most recent events that were logged by the LAN Network Manager program and is updated dynamically. There is no action bar on this window. To display details for particular events, go to the Event Log window. If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the dynamic event list. ═══ Set soft error reporting options ═══ To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs and whether you want to log all, some, or none of the soft errors, select Set soft error reporting options, on the Events pull-down menu. The Set Soft Error Reporting Options window appears. This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating in limited mode. ═══ 203. Set Soft Error Reporting Options ═══ To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs and whether you want to log all, some, or none of the soft errors, select Set soft error reporting options, on the Events pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Segment Number A scrollable list of segment numbers from which to choose. Current option The soft-error reporting option currently in effect for the selected segment. Current segment The segment for which the current reporting option is in effect. New option The new soft-error reporting option. To select a segment from the list, double-click on the segment number. The LAN Network Manager program displays the current soft-error reporting option in effect for that segment. To change the reporting option for the segment, select an option from the New option field. A controlling LAN Network Manager program can specify soft-error reporting for any segment displayed in the list. If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can specify soft-error reporting for the local LAN segment only. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Apply To accept the changed information. The window remains open, allowing you to make more changes. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 204. Segment number ═══ Select the number of the segment for which you want to change the soft-error reporting option. ═══ 205. New option ═══ Specify one of the following: Log limited Log the soft errors for adapters in areas of the Token-Ring segment where large numbers of soft errors are occurring. Only those soft-error reports from adapters that are accumulating excessive soft errors are logged. The LAN Network Manager program also logs soft-error reports from the adapters that are upstream and downstream of the adapters with excessive soft errors. Log all Log the soft errors for the entire Token-Ring segment. All soft error reports from all adapters on the Token-Ring segment are logged. This option can be used for only one Token-Ring segment in the network at a time. If this option is selected, the following messages are logged: DFIPD104 I Recovered error counters DFIPD106 I Ring error report DFIPD108 W Ring poll failure DFIPD109 W Ring monitor error: ring recovered DFIPD224 I New ring monitor. None To receive alerts for troubleshooting, without logging the soft-error reports that caused the alerts. No individual soft-error reports are logged. This is the recommended setting for soft error reporting. None (and reset counters) To erase the counters for soft errors that have occurred up to now or to reset the counters if you have received the alert LAN Network Manager error reporter failed. The internal counters for soft error reporting are reset to 0. This option updates the error logging mode to No soft error reporting. ═══ 206. Clear event log ═══ To delete all events from the event log, select Clear event log, on the Events pull-down menu. ═══ Event log filters ═══ To define, change, or delete filters for event logging, select Event log filters, on the Events pull-down menu. The Event Log Filters window appears. Event log filters prevent events and alerts from being logged in the LAN Network Manager database. However, alerts are still forwarded to the host if there is an active host connection and if you have not defined an alert filter to block these alerts. ═══ 207. Event Log Filters ═══ To define, change, or delete filters for event logging, select Event log filters, on the Events pull-down menu. The window lists all the defined event-log filters. The list box that displays the event-log filters contains the following fields: Status Whether the filter is active or inactive. Description The user-defined description of the filter. Event log filters prevent events and alerts from being logged in the LAN Network Manager database. However, alerts are still forwarded to the host if there is an active host connection and if you have not defined an alert filter to block these alerts. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to add a new event-log filter or modify the parameters of an existing event-log filter. ═══ Event Log Filters Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Event Log Filters window, to use the following functions: Add event log filter To define a filter for event logging. Change event log filter To change any of the parameters for a selected filter. If you do not select one or more filters from the filters list, this option is unavailable. Delete event log filter To delete one or more selected filters. A message is displayed to confirm the request. Refresh To redisplay the Event Log Filters window with any updated information. ═══ Add event filter ═══ To define a filter for event logging, select Add event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window. The Add Event Filter window is displayed. ═══ Change event filter ═══ To change the definition of one or more existing filters, select the filters, and then select Change event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window. If you do not select one or more filters from the filters list, this option is unavailable. The Change Event Filter window appears. ═══ Delete event filter ═══ To delete the definition of one or more existing filters, select the filters, and then select Delete event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window. A message is displayed to confirm the request. ═══ 208. Add or Change Event Log Filter ═══ To add a new filter for event logging, select Add event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window. To change the definition of an existing filter, select Change event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window. When you define a filter, events are compared to the filter. If an event meets all of the specified criteria, the event is not logged. If you define more than one filter, events are compared to all the filters. If an event meets all the criteria of any one of the filters, it is not logged. If you leave a filter parameter blank, the filter applies to all the values for that parameter. For example, if you do not specify a segment, the filter applies to all segments. If you specify a segment but do not specify any events, the filter blocks all events associated with that segment. This window contains the following fields: Filter description The user-defined description of the filter. This field is required and can contain up to 40 characters, including blanks. Filter status Whether the filter is active or inactive. Received from this date...to The starting and ending dates that define the period during which you want to filter events. This field is optional. If you enter a date, enter data in all six fields. Received from this time...to The starting and ending times that define the period during which you want to filter events. This field is optional. If you enter a time, enter data in all six fields. Segment numbers The segments for which you want to filter events. The list box displays all segments that the LAN Network Manager program is aware of. You can select one or more segments from the list box. This field is optional. Events The events that you want to filter. You can select one or more events from the list box. This field is optional. Involving one of the following The resource for which you want to filter events. These fields are mutually exclusive. Adapter address or name The hexadecimal address or the symbolic name of the adapter. This field is optional. Bridge name The user-defined name of the bridge. This field is optional. CAU ID The 8-digit identifier of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). This field is optional. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add or Change To add or change the event-log filter. When you add, the pushbutton remains open, allowing you to add another event-log filter. When you change, the event-log filter is changed, and the window closes. If you selected Add event log filter to enter this window, the pushbutton reads Add. If you entered Change event log filter to enter this window, the pushbutton reads Change. This pushbutton is not available if: o No description is entered o Only a description is entered (no other parameters) o An invalid or incomplete date or time is entered o An invalid CAU ID or adapter name is entered. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Filter description ═══ Describe the event-log filter that you are defining. You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks. This field is required. ═══ Filter status ═══ Specify whether the filter is active or inactive. The default setting for this field is Active. ═══ Received from this date...to ═══ Specify the starting and ending dates for the period during which you want to filter events. This field is optional and is in the format of mm/dd/yy (mm = month, dd = day, and yy = year). If you enter a date, enter data in all six fields. The format of this field is dependent on the code page that you are using. Different countries use different code pages, and the format of the date changes depending on the country in which you are using the LAN Network Manager program. For example, if you have the line CODEPAGE=850,437 in your CONFIG.SYS file, you get the United Kingdom code page, which gives a date format of dd/mm/yy. If you enter a number lower than 70 in the year field, the LAN Network Manager program assumes the year to be in the 21st century. For example, if you enter 06/07/68, the LAN Network Manager program interprets that date as June 7, 2068. If you enter a number higher than 70 in the year field, the LAN Network Manager program assumes the year to be in the 20th century. For example, if you enter 06/07/95, the LAN Network Manager program interprets that date as June 7, 1995. ═══ Received from this time...to ═══ Specify the starting and ending times that define the period during which you want to filter events. This field is optional and is in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh = hours, mm = minutes, and ss = seconds). If you enter a time, enter data in all six fields. Valid entries are 00:00:00-23:59:59. ═══ From LAN segments ═══ Specify the LAN segments for which you want to filter events. This field is optional. Valid entries are 000-FFF. The list box displays all the segments that the LAN Network Manager program is aware of. You can select one or more segments from the list box. You can also define filters for segments that the LAN Network Manager program is not yet aware of by entering that segment number in the entry field above the list box. If the segment already exists in the list box, the list box scrolls to that segment and the segment is selected. If the segment does not exist in the list box, the segment is added and the list box is scrolled to the new segment. If an event is received from any of the selected segments, the event then meets the criteria for this parameter. ═══ Events ═══ Specify the events that you want to filter. Select one or more events from the list box. This field is optional. The list is generated from the message-text table in the LAN Network Manager database. The list box contains the message number and the text for each message in the table. If an event matches any of the selected events, the event then meets the criteria for this parameter. ═══ Adapter address or name ═══ Specify the address or the name of the adapter for which you want to filter events. This field is optional. You can enter either the hexadecimal address (12 digits) or the symbolic name (1-16 characters). If an event is received from the specified adapter, the event then meets the criteria for this parameter. ═══ Bridge name ═══ Specify the name of the bridge for which you want to filter events. This field is optional. The bridge name is defined by the user and consists of 1-8 characters in any combination of the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $, and %. If an event is received from the specified bridge, the event then meets the criteria for this parameter. ═══ CAU ID ═══ Specify the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) for which you want to filter events. This field is optional. The CAU ID is the 8-digit hexadecimal number that identifies a specific CAU. If an event is received from the specified CAU, the event then meets the criteria for this parameter. ═══ 209. Lists ═══ Select Lists, from the network level view window, to use the following functions: Segments To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network Manager program has been linked since startup or restart. Stations To display a list of all the stations known to the LAN Network Manager program on a segment. Bridges To display a list of all the defined bridges. CAUs To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) in the CAU table of the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Segments ═══ To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network Manager program has been linked since startup or restart, select Segments, on the Lists pull-down menu. The Segments window is displayed. In the list of segments, the asterisk (*) identifies the local LAN segment. ═══ 210. Segments ═══ To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network Manager program has been linked since startup or restart, select Segments, on the Lists pull-down menu. In the list of segments, the asterisk (*) identifies the local LAN segment. This window contains the following fields: Segment The segment number Segment Status The status of the segment. The possible Token-Ring Network segment statuses are Normal, Soft error, Beaconing, Wrapped, and Unknown. The possible PC Network segment statuses are Normal, Continuous carrier, and Unknown. Segment Type The type of the LAN segment being monitored. Possible LAN types are Token-Ring Network, PC Network(T), and Ethernet/IEEE 802.3. This field also displays the speed of data exchange on the segment. Linked Bridges Number of bridges linked to the LAN segment. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display the configuration list of the segments, test a segment, display details about the segment's status, and display the ring utilization for the segment. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying the list of segments. ═══ 211. Possible Token-Ring Network Statuses ═══ Possible LAN Network Manager statuses for a Token-Ring Network are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Soft Error Intermittent failures are causing data to be transmitted on the LAN segment more than once in order to be received correctly. The alert that accompanies the Soft Error status includes the fault domain (the segment of the network that is experiencing the failures). Beaconing Either there is signal loss (possibly caused by a broken line), or no token is circulating the LAN segment within the predefined time limit. Beaconing indicates that the LAN segment is inoperative. The status on the Segments window does not change to Beaconing until the LAN segment that is experiencing the problem is in a permanent beaconing condition (when the LAN segment fails to recover during the automatic removal process). You can look at the alert to find the fault domain. Wrapped The Token-Ring is using the backup path. This status can be received for a segment with an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) or an IBM 8220 Optical Fiber Converter. Unknown One of the following is true: o The LAN Network Manager program is no longer linked to any bridges on that segment. o The LAN Network Manager program is linked to the segment through the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge Version 1, which does not support the ring error monitor (REM) or the configuration report server (CRS) for the Token-Ring Network. o The LAN Network Manager program is linked to the segment through a 3174-Peer Bridge. o The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter is Adapter closed or Wire fault. ═══ 212. Possible PC Network Status ═══ Possible LAN Network Manager status conditions for a PC Network(T) are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Continuous Carrier A PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a continuous-transmission mode. No other PC Network adapters can transmit until the problem is resolved. The bus is inoperative. The bus can recover automatically if the problem adapter removes itself. Otherwise, you might receive an alert to indicate the failing device. Continuous carrier is sometimes called hot carrier. Continuous carrier status is accompanied by one of the following messages: DFIPD209* Auto-removal error DFIPD350 Continuous carrier: network recovered DFIPD352* Bus inoperative - continuous carrier DFIPD353 Bus recovered from continuous carrier DFIPD354* Continuous carrier recovered: adapter removed DFIPD355* Continuous carrier: source unknown Note: An asterisk (*) beside a message indicates that it is an alert. Unknown The LAN Network Manager program is no longer linked to the segment, or the status of the LAN Network Manager adapter is Adapter closed. ═══ Actions ═══ Select a segment, and then select Actions, on the Segments window, to use the following functions: Display configuration list To display a list of all the adapters on the selected segment. Test segment To test the selected segment for data-transfer capability. Segment status details To display error information and the status for the selected segment. Ring utilization To display the ring utilization for the selected segment. ═══ Display configuration list ═══ To display a list of all the adapters on a segment, select the segment, and then select Display configuration list, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window. The Configuration List window is displayed. It provides the name (if assigned), address, status, and functions of each adapter listed in the window. ═══ 213. Configuration List ═══ To display a list of all the adapters on a segment, select the segment, and then select Display configuration list, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window. This window contains the following fields: LAN segment number/type The number and type of the selected segment, including the transmission speed. LAN segment status The status of the selected segment. Adapter Address/Name The address and name, if defined, for each adapter on the segment. Active Whether the adapter is currently active in the network. Function names The name that indicates the adapter's function. An adapter can have up to 31 possible functional names. If you change a segment number on the Configuration Parameters window, the previous segment number still appears in the configuration list with a status of Unknown. The adapters on that segment are displayed as being both on the previous segment number, with a status of inactive, and on the new segment number, with their current status. The previous segment number disappears from the configuration list when you restart the LAN Network Manager program. The adapters on the previous segment number are deleted from the configuration list when the time interval that is specified in the configuration monitor age-out field expires. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to locate adapters in the list, query adapters and remove them, add or change station definitions, and request an immediate resynchronization of the network. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying the list of stations. ═══ 214. Possible Functional Addresses/Names ═══ This field provides a hexadecimal group address representing all the functional addresses available in the LAN Network Manager adapter. Each ON bit in the hexadecimal string represents a function performed by the station, such as active monitor, LAN error monitor, or configuration report server. The list box contains the names of the functions associated with the functional address for the adapter. Scroll through the list to view the functions in the list box. For a list of possible functional addresses, see Using LAN Network Manager. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Configuration List window, to use the following functions: Find To locate an adapter in the list. Profile To display the profile for a selected station. Remove adapter To remove a selected station. This action is available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Add definition To define a station. Change definition To change the definition of a station. If you do not select one or more stations from the configuration list, this option is unavailable. Resync To request an immediate resynchronization of the configuration table and the location table. ═══ Find ═══ To locate a specific adapter in the list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Find Adapter window appears. ═══ 215. Find Adapter ═══ To locate a specific adapter in the list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. This window contains the following field: Adapter address or name The address or the symbolic name of the adapter that you want to locate. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To close this window and display the list again with the specified adapter highlighted. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or contextual help for a field if the cursor is in a field. ═══ 216. Find Adapter Information ═══ If you use Find from the Configuration List window, the LAN Network Manager program searches the current configuration list for the adapter. If the adapter exists on another segment, the LAN Network Manager program does not find it and displays a message that the adapter was not found in the configuration list. If you use Find from the Stations List window, the LAN Network Manager program searches across segments but within the specified view option (All defined, All undefined, Some defined). If the LAN Network Manager program finds the adapter within the specified view but not on the current segment, the program does the following: o Changes the current segment to be the segment on which the adapter was found o Displays the stations on the new current segment o Highlights the specified adapter within the list. If the adapter is not within the specified view, regardless of which segment it is on, the LAN Network Manager program does not find the adapter and displays a message that the adapter is not in the current view. ═══ Profile ═══ To display the profile for a station, select the station, and then select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station window. The Station Profile window appears. ═══ Add definition ═══ To define a station, select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station window. The Station Definition window appears. The adapter address and adapter name fields are blank. To add a definition for an undefined station in the list, select the adapter and then select Change definition. When the Station Definition window is displayed, the LAN Network Manager program fills in the adapter address field. ═══ Change definition ═══ To change a station definition, select the station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station window. The Station Definition window appears. ═══ 217. Resync ═══ To request an immediate resynchronization of the configuration table and the location table, select Resync, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. Resynchronization enables the LAN Network Manager program to maintain an accurate network configuration by querying each adapter or bridge and verifying the database with current information. Resynchronization also performs security checking by identifying unauthorized adapters. If you select either or both of the fields on the LAN Station Manager Options window, the LAN Network Manager program updates the PC Information and PC Network(T) Attachment tables in the database. Depending on the size of your network, the time required to perform a resynchronization can be considerable. ═══ View ═══ Select View, on the Configuration List window, to use the following functions: All To display a list of all the stations on the selected segment. Some To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the selected segment. Sort by To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations displayed. Refresh To redisplay the Configuration List window, indicating any updated information. If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All ═══ To display a list of all the stations for a segment, select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all stations are currently displayed. ═══ Some ═══ To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the selected segment, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Some Adapters window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of adapters that meet the criteria that you specify on the Some Adapters window are displayed. ═══ 218. Some Adapters ═══ To specify criteria for displaying some stations for a segment, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. This window contains the following fields: Active Whether you want to display active adapters, inactive adapters, or both. Function names The function names of the adapters that you want to display. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the adapter list according to the specified criteria. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Active ═══ Specify whether you want to display active adapters, inactive adapters, or both. ═══ Function names ═══ Select one or more of the following to display adapters with that function name: REM/LEM Ring-error monitors Active Monitor The active monitor CRS Configuration-report servers RPS/LPS Ring-parameter servers or LAN-parameters servers LAN Manager LAN Network Manager adapters Bridge Bridge adapters NETBIOS NETBIOS adapters CON Concentrators, such as the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) Discovery Locate Adapters that use discovery-name management Remote Program Update Adapters that can perform a remote program update on a CAU LAN Gateway The LAN gateway Station Manager LAN Station Manager adapters. ═══ Sort by ═══ To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Sort Adapters window appears. ═══ 219. Sort Adapters ═══ To specify criteria by which you want the current list of adapters to be sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. Select one of the following: o Name o Address o Upstream o Downstream The selections Upstream and Downstream are based on the adapter's inserting position in the segment and apply to Token-Ring Networks only. The default sort criteria for Token-Ring Networks is Upstream. The default sort criteria for PC Networks(T) is Address. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close this window and sort the list. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Ring utilization ═══ To display information about how much of the total data-transmission capacity of the segment is being used, select a Token-Ring segment, and then select Ring utilization, on the Actions pull-down of the Segments window. The LAN Network Manager program displays this information as the percentage of possible ring utilization that is in use at the time of the query. The Ring Utilization window appears. ═══ 220. Ring Utilization ═══ To display information about how much of the total data-transmission capacity of the segment is being used, select a Token-Ring segment, and then select Ring utilization, on the Actions pull-down of the Segments window. This window contains the following fields: Segment number The hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the selected segment. Segment type The type and transmission speed of the selected segment. Segment status The current status of the selected segment. Ring utilization The current ring utilization, expressed as a percentage of the possible ring utilization. This information is available only if there is a station on the ring that is currently managed by the LAN Network Manager program and that has the following components installed: o The LAN Station Manager program o The hardware that supports the ring-utilization parameter (IBM(T) Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter/A, order number 74F9410, feature code 0149) Extended Services 1.0 (ES 1.0). o Either Extended Services 1.0 (ES 1.0), for OS/2(T), or LAN Support Program 1.2 or higher, for DOS. If the LAN Network Manager program is unable to complete the query, this field displays Unknown. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Refresh To redisplay the window with any updated information. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 221. Segment status ═══ Possible statuses for Token-Ring segments are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Beaconing The LAN segment is inoperative due to signal loss, or no token is circulating within the predefined time limit. Soft Error The LAN segment is experiencing intermittent failures that cause the data to be transmitted on the LAN segment more than once. Wrapped The Token-Ring Network is using the backup path. Unknown The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager program. Possible statuses for PC Network(T) segments are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Continuous Carrier The PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a continuous-transmission mode. Unknown The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager program. Possible statuses for Ethernet segments are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Unknown The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager program. Possible statuses for 3174-Peer segments are: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Unknown The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 222. Unknown status for 3174-Peer Bridge ═══ The 3174 Establishment Controller with Peer Communication bridge does not provide Token-Ring management functions, such as the configuration report server (CRS). The 3174-Peer bridge supports management function only for the 3174-Peer segment to which it is attached. If you are linked to a 3174-Peer bridge that is connected to a Token-Ring segment, the LAN Network Manager program cannot provide any management function for that Token-Ring segment, unless you have another LAN Network Manager program running on that segment or unless you are also linked to that segment through a Token-Ring bridge. If the LAN Network Manager program is unable to provide management function, such as resynchronizing the ring, for the Token-Ring segment, the status for that segment is displayed as UNKNOWN. ═══ 223. Segment type ═══ Possible segment types are: o Token-Ring 4 megabits (Mbps) o Token-Ring 16 Mbps o CSMA/CD LAN 2 Mbps o Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 10 Mbps o 3174-Peer 0.5 Mbps ═══ View ═══ Select View, on the Segments window, to use the following functions: All To display a list of all the segments in the managed domain. Some To specify criteria that determine which segments are displayed. Refresh To redisplay the Segments window, indicating any updated information from the LAN Network Manager program. If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All ═══ To display a list of all the segments in the managed domain, select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Segments window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all segments are currently displayed. ═══ Some ═══ To specify criteria that determine which segments are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Segments window. The Some Segments window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of segments that are specified on the Some Segments window are displayed. ═══ 224. Some Segments ═══ To specify criteria for displaying some of the monitored segments, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Segments window. This window contains the following fields: Segment types The types of segments that you want to display. Segment status The status of the segments that you want to display. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the segments list according to the specified criteria. If you clear all of the check boxes in either field, this pushbutton is not available. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Segment type ═══ Select one or more of the following to display segments of that type: Token-Ring 4 Mbps Displays a list of Token-Ring Network segments operating at 4 megabits per second (Mbps). Token-Ring 16 Mbps Displays a list of Token-Ring Network segments operating at 16 Mbps. CSMA/CD LAN 2 Mbps Displays a list of carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) LAN segments operating at 2 Mbps. PC Network segments fall into this category. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Displays a list of Ethernet segments. 3174-Peer 0.5 Mbps Displays a list of 3174-Peer segments. ═══ Segment status ═══ Select one or more of the following to display segments with that status: Normal The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the LAN segment is operating normally. Beaconing The LAN segment is inoperative due to signal loss, or no token is circulating within the predefined time limit. Soft Error The LAN segment is experiencing intermittent failures that cause the data to be transmitted on the LAN segment more than once. Wrapped The Token-Ring Network is using the backup path. Continuous Carrier A PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a continuous-transmission mode. Unknown The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Refresh ═══ To redisplay the current window, including any updated information from the LAN Network Manager program, select Refresh, on the View pull-down menu of the current window. ═══ Stations ═══ To display a list of all the stations that the LAN Network Manager program is aware of on a specified segment, select Stations, on the Lists pull-down menu. You can select the segment from a list box. The Stations window appears. ═══ 225. Stations ═══ To display a list of all the stations that the LAN Network Manager program is aware of on a specified segment, select Stations, on the Lists pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Current Segment The 3-digit number of the segment that is currently selected. Seg The list box that displays all the segments that are known to the LAN Network Manager program. UNK indicates stations that have definitions but have not been found on any segment. Adapter Name The symbolic name of the station's adapter, as specified on the Station Definition window. Adapter Addr The address of the station's adapter. Monitored? Whether this station's adapter is defined to be monitored, as specified on the Station Definition window. Trace? Whether this station's adapter is authorized to trace, as specified on the Station Definition window. To display all the stations on a specific segment, double-click on that segment in the Seg list box. The Stations window is redisplayed and lists those stations. To display defined stations that are not associated with a specific segment, double-click on UNK (segment unknown) in the Seg list box. The Stations window is redisplayed and lists those stations. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to locate a station in the list, add, change or delete a station definition, and display the profile of a station. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying the list of stations. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Stations window, to use the following functions: Find To locate an adapter in the list. Profile To display the profile for a selected station. Remove adapter To remove a selected station. This action is available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program. Add definition To define a station. Change definition To change the definition of a station. If you do not select one or more stations from the stations list, this option is unavailable. Delete definition To delete the definition of a selected station. ═══ Delete definition ═══ To delete the definition of a station, select the station, and then select Delete definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window. Deleting a station definition does not delete the station information from the database. The entries in the configuration table for inactive stations are removed from the database when the configuration-monitor age-out interval, specified on the Miscellaneous Parameters window, is reached. ═══ View ═══ Select View, on the Stations window, to use the following functions: All defined To display all defined stations for the selected segment. All undefined To display all undefined stations for the selected segment. Some defined To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the selected segment. Sort by To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations that are displayed. Refresh To redisplay the Stations window, indicating any updated information. If there is a check mark by All defined, All undefined, or Some defined, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All defined ═══ To display all the defined stations for the selected segment, select All defined, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all defined stations are currently displayed. ═══ All undefined ═══ To display all the undefined stations for the selected segment, select All undefined, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all undefined stations are currently displayed. ═══ Some defined ═══ To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the selected segment, select Some defined, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Some Stations window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of stations that are specified on the Some Stations window are displayed. ═══ 226. Some Stations ═══ To specify criteria for displaying some stations for the selected segment, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. This window contains the following fields: Trace status Whether to display stations that are defined to be authorized to trace. Monitored status Whether to display stations that are defined to be monitored. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the adapter list according to the specified criteria. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Sort by ═══ To specify criteria by which you want the current list of stations to be sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. The Sort Stations window appears. ═══ 227. Sort Stations ═══ To specify criteria by which you want the current list of stations to be sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window. Select one of the following: o Station name o Station address Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close this window and sort the list. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Bridges ═══ To display a list of all the defined bridges, select Bridges, on the Lists pull-down menu. The Bridges window appears. ═══ 228. Bridges ═══ To display a list of all the defined bridges, select Bridges, on the Lists pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: Bridge Name The name of the bridge. This is specified on the Bridge definition window. Bridge Status The status of the bridge. The status can be Normal, Not linked, Link busy, or No carrier. No carrier applies to PC Network(T) bridges only. LAN Seg The segments to which the bridge is attached. Brg Num The bridge number. Auto Link Whether the bridge is defined for automatic linking. This is specified on the Bridge definition window. Performance Notification The number of whole minutes that pass before the bridge sends performance counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program. If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, this interval is displayed as 0. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to do the following: o Locate a bridge in the list o Add, change, or delete a bridge definition o Display the profile of a bridge o Link and unlink bridges o Display bridge performance information. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying the list of bridges. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Bridges window, to use the following functions: Find To locate a bridge in the bridges list. Profile To display the profile for a selected bridge. Link To attempt to link to a selected bridge. Unlink To unlink from a selected bridge. Add definition To define a bridge. Change definition To change the definition of a bridge. If you do not select one or more bridges from the bridges list, this option is unavailable. Delete definition To delete the definition of a selected bridge. ═══ Find ═══ To locate a bridge in the bridges list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Find Bridge window appears. ═══ 229. Find Bridge ═══ To locate a bridge in the bridges list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. This window contains the following field: Enter bridge name The name of the bridge that you want to locate in the bridges list. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To close this window and display the list again, with the specified bridge highlighted. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Add definition ═══ To define a bridge, select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Bridge Definition window appears. ═══ Change definition ═══ To change a bridge definition, select the bridge, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Bridge Definition window appears. ═══ Profile ═══ To display the profile for a bridge, select the bridge, and then select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Bridge Profile window appears. ═══ Delete definition ═══ To delete the definition of a bridge, select the bridge, and then select Delete definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window. ═══ View ═══ Select View, on the Bridges window, to use the following functions: All To display all the bridges that are defined. Some To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are displayed. Sort by To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges that are displayed. Refresh To redisplay the Bridges window, indicating any updated information. If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All ═══ To display all the bridges that are defined to the LAN Network Manager program, select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all defined bridges are currently displayed. ═══ Some ═══ To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Some Bridges window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of bridges that are specified on the Some Bridges window are displayed. ═══ 230. Some Bridges ═══ To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. This window contains the following fields: Bridge status The status according to which you want to display bridges. Autolink status Whether you want to display bridges that are defined for automatic linking. LAN segment The LAN segment according to which you want to display bridges. Notification interval The notification interval according to which you want to display bridges. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the bridges list according to the specified criteria. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Bridge status ═══ Select one or more of the following to display bridges with that status: o Normal o Not linked o Link busy o No carrier (PC Network only). ═══ Autolink status ═══ Specify whether you want to display bridges that are defined for automatic linking, not defined for automatic linking, or both. The autolink status for a bridge is specified on the Bridge Definition window. ═══ LAN segment ═══ Select a segment from the list to display the bridges on that segment. ═══ Notification interval ═══ Specify whether you want to display bridges with a notification interval, without a notification interval, or both. The notification interval for a bridge is specified on the Performance Data window. ═══ Sort by ═══ To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. The Sort Bridges window appears. ═══ 231. Sort Bridges ═══ To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. Select one of the following: o Bridge name, listed alphabetically o LAN segment number, listed numerically Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close this window and sort the list. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Controlled Access Units ═══ To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAU) in the Controlled Access Unit table of the LAN Network Manager program, select CAUs, on the Lists pull-down menu. The Controlled Access Units window appears. ═══ 232. Controlled Access Units ═══ To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAU) in the Controlled Access Unit table of the LAN Network Manager program, select CAUs, on the Lists pull-down menu. This window contains the following fields: CAU ID The identifier of the CAU. This is specified on the Controlled Access Unit definition window. CAU Status The status of the CAU. LAN Seg The segment to which the CAU is attached. Registered Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to do the following: o Locate a CAU in the list o Add, change, or delete a CAU definition o Display the profile of a CAU o Display segments that are accessed without a link o Update the microcode in a CAU. o Attempt and cancel registration with a CAU. Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for displaying the list of CAUs. ═══ 233. Possible Controlled Access Unit Statuses ═══ Possible statuses for IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) are: Normal The signal is open on the main ring path, and the backup path is being checked. Wrap RI The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the ring-in (RI) side. Wrap RO The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the ring-out (RO) side. Wrap RI/RO The CAU has removed itself from the main ring and forms an internal ring. Unknown The status of the CAU is unknown. The status is unknown if you have defined the CAU and the LAN Network Manager program has not yet identified the CAU as being on the network. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Units window, to use the following functions: Find To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the list. Add CAU definition To define a CAU. Change CAU definition To change the definition of a selected CAU. Profile To display the profile for a selected CAU. Qualifiers To display a list of CAU qualifiers.. Update enable To update the microcode in a selected CAU. Register To attempt to register with a CAU. Deregister To cancel registration with a CAU. Delete CAU definition To delete the definition of a selected CAU. ═══ Find ═══ To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the CAUs list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Find Controlled Access Unit window appears. ═══ 234. Find Controlled Access Unit ═══ To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the CAUs list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This window contains the following field: Enter CAU ID The ID of the CAU that you want to locate in the Controlled Access Units list. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Find To close this window and display the list again, with the specified CAU highlighted. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Add CAU definition ═══ To define an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Add CAU definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Controlled Access Unit Definition window appears. ═══ Change CAU definition ═══ To change the definition of an existing IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the CAU, and then select Change CAU definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Controlled Access Unit Definition window appears. ═══ Profile ═══ To display the profile for an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Controlled Access Unit Profile window appears. ═══ Qualifiers ═══ To display a list of CAU qualifiers, select Qualifiers from the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The CAU Qualifiers window appears. ═══ 235. CAU Qualifiers ═══ To display a list of CAU qualifiers, select Qualifiers from the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The segment numbers (3 digits) of the qualifiers are listed in a scrollable box in the center of the window. Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to add a segment to or delete a segment from the list. ═══ Actions ═══ Select Actions, on the CAU Qualifiers window, to use the following functions: Add To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers. Delete To remove a segment from the list of CAU qualifiers. ═══ Add ═══ To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers, select Add, on the Actions pull-down menu of the CAU Qualifiers window. The Add Qualifier window is displayed. ═══ 236. Add Qualifier ═══ To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers, select Add, on the Actions pull-down menu of the CAU Qualifiers window. Upon resynchronization, the LAN Network Manager program searches the segments in the list for Controlled Access Units (CAUs). As the LAN Network Manager program locates each CAU, it adds the CAU to the list of CAUs displayed on the Controlled Access Units window, and attempts to register with the CAU. The Add Qualifiers window contains the following field: Enter Qualifier The number of the segment that you want to add to the list of CAU qualifiers. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Add To add the specified segment to the list. When you select the Add pushbutton, the segment appears in the list on the CAU Qualifiers window. The Add Qualifier window also remains open, allowing you to enter more qualifiers. Cancel To close this window. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ Enter Qualifier ═══ Enter the hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the segment that you want to add to the list of CAU qualifiers. ═══ Delete ═══ To delete a segment from the list of CAU qualifiers, select the segment number in the list and then select Delete, on the Actions pull-down menu of the CAU Qualifiers window. This option is not available until you select a segment number from the list. ═══ Update enable ═══ To update the microcode in an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Update enable, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Controlled Access Unit Update Enable window appears. ═══ Register ═══ To manually register the LAN Network Manager program with a Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Register, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This manual function is in addition to the automatic registration and deregistration function that the LAN Network Manager program provides. This function is available only to a controlling LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Deregister ═══ To manually cancel registration of the LAN Network Manager program with a Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Deregister, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This manual function is in addition to the automatic registration and deregistration function that the LAN Network Manager program provides. This function is available only to a controlling LAN Network Manager program. ═══ Delete definition ═══ To delete the definition of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Delete definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. ═══ View ═══ Select View, on the Controlled Access Units window, to use the following functions: All To display all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are defined to the LAN Network Manager program. Some To specify criteria that determine which defined CAUs are displayed. Sort by To specify criteria that determine the order of the CAUs that are displayed. Refresh To redisplay the Controlled Access Units window, indicating any updated information. If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in effect. ═══ All ═══ To display all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are defined to the LAN Network Manager program, select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. If there is a check mark by this selection, all defined CAUs are currently displayed. ═══ Some ═══ To specify criteria that determine which defined IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Some Controlled Access Units window appears. If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of CAUs that are specified on the Some Controlled Access Units window are displayed. ═══ 237. Some Controlled Access Units ═══ To specify criteria that determine which defined IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. This window contains the following fields: CAU status The status according to which you want to display CAUs. Segment No The LAN segment according to which you want to display CAUs. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Set To accept the changed information and display the CAU list according to the specified criteria. Reset To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN Network Manager program. Also, resets any changed fields to their initial values. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ CAU Status ═══ Select one or more of the following to display IBM 8230Controlled Access Units (CAUs) with that status. o Normal o Wrap RI o Wrap RO o Wrap RI/RO o Unknown If you clear all the check boxes, the Set pushbutton is unavailable. ═══ Segment No ═══ Select a segment from the list to display the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) on that segment. To view all the defined CAUs that meet the criteria specified in the CAU Status field, select All. To view all the defined CAUs that meet the criteria specified in the CAU Status field but for which the LAN Network Manager program has no associated LAN segment number, select UNK. ═══ Sort by ═══ To specify criteria that determine the order of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. The Sort Controlled Access Units window appears. ═══ 238. Sort Controlled Access Units ═══ To specify criteria that determine the order of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window. Select one of the following: o CAU ID, listed numerically. o LAN segment number, listed numerically. Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following: Sort To close this window and sort the list. Cancel To close this window without performing any action. Help To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a field, contextual help for the field. ═══ 239. Message DFIPD006 - Help ═══ Message Operation completed successfully. Meaning: The operation that you requested has completed successfully. Action: None ═══ 240. Message DFIPD007 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed. Meaning: The operation that you requested has failed. Action: Determine the status of the LAN Network Manager program. If the status is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you attempt the operation again. If the status is Normal, wait momentarily and retry the operation. ═══ 241. Message DFIPD008 - Help ═══ Message Command submitted successfully. Meaning: You have requested to either update the microcode in the CAU or change the status of a lobe attachment module from Enabled to Disabled or from Disabled to Enabled. Your request has been successfully submitted to the Controlled Access Unit. If you requested to change the status of a lobe attachment module, you will need to select Refresh to view the new status. Action: Select OK to continue. ═══ 242. Message DFIPD009 - Help ═══ Message No events have been found for this resource. Meaning: Currently, there are no events in the event log for the resource that you have selected. The event could have been filtered using the Event Log filters or the event could be an alert for an adapter on this segment, but the alert does not contain the segment number. Action: If the color of the resource indicates a change in status, go to the Segment Level View and display the events for each resource whose status has changed (indicated by a change in color). ═══ 243. Message DFIPD054 - Help ═══ Message The LAN Network Manager program cannot be loaded. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has detected that another IBM LAN management program is already running. You can run only one LAN Network Manager program or LAN Manager program at a time. Also, LAN Network Manager cannot be loaded if any LAN Network Manager utility programs are running. Action: Look in the OS/2 task list for one of the following active programs and end it. o LAN Manager 2.0 o LAN Network Manager 1.0 o LAN Network Manager 1.1 o LAN Network Manager - Transfer utility o LAN Network Manager - Migration utility ═══ 244. Message DFIPD126 - Help ═══ Message Maximum number of monitored adapters have been defined. Meaning: You have requested to add a station definition that contains a request to monitor the station's adapter. However, the number of stations that are defined as monitored has already reached the maximum number allowed (1000). The LAN Network Manager program will permit you to add this station definition if you change the monitoring option to No. Action: If the monitoring option is set to Yes in the definition of a non-critical station, change monitoring to No. If there is another LAN Network Manager program in the network, you can add a definition for the station at that LAN Network Manager program and include a request for adapter monitoring. ═══ 245. Message DFIPD174 - Help ═══ Message Delete definition is not permitted for a linked bridge - one or more of the bridges is linked by LAN Network Manager. Meaning: You tried to delete the definitions of one or more bridges with which the LAN Network Manager program has established a communication link. Action: Terminate the communication link with the bridge. You can then delete the definition. ═══ 246. Message DFIPD176 - Help ═══ Message Adapter address not unique. Meaning: You have entered a duplicate adapter address. Either you entered the same address for both adapters on this bridge, or you entered an adapter address that is already defined elsewhere in the network. Adapter addresses defined to the LAN Network Manager program must always be unique addresses. Action: Verify the address and retype it. ═══ 247. Message DFIPD177 - Help ═══ Message Segment number not unique. Meaning: You have entered the same segment number for both adapters. The adapters in a bridge are always on different LAN segments. Action: Enter unique LAN segment numbers for each bridge adapter. ═══ 248. Message DFIPD193 - Help ═══ Message Frame error. Meaning: A frame error occurred while performing the requested function because a frame was not constructed properly (it does not conform to the published frame architecture), the target station does not recognize the command (because of an earlier version of software in the station), or the target station cannot process the command (because of an internal error). This error can also occur if the target device is an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit and access is denied. Access is denied if the CAU is not registered or if an incorrect password is used. Action: If the error occurs when the target device is a station or bridge, determine the status of that device. If the error occurs when the target device is a CAU, determine if the LAN Network Manager program is registered with the CAU by using the CAU profile function. If it is registered and the error still occurs, then restart the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 249. Message DFIPD209 - Help ═══ Message Auto-removal error. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has automatically removed its own adapter from the LAN segment as the result of a beaconing or continuous-carrier condition. This message is an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host. This message is logged with the following data: 1. LAN segment number 2. Adapter address 3. Adapter number. Action: If you came from the problem determination procedures in the IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, return to the step that sent you here. Otherwise, record the data section of the message and perform problem determination procedures using the IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, or the IBM PC Network Hardware Maintenance and Service, as appropriate. ═══ 250. Message DFIPD211 - Help ═══ Message Unable to open LAN Network Manager's adapter. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program could not open its adapter. This data section of this message displays the following information: 1. Adapter address 2. Adapter number 3. Miscellaneous data This data includes the adapter command and the CCB return code, which is defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference, for the DIR.OPEN.ADAPTER command. Action: Select Retry and the LAN Network Manager program will attempt to open the adapter again. If the problem persists, run the diagnostics for the adapter. If the diagnostics indicate that the adapter is operational and you still get this message, record the data section of the message and contact the service supplier. ═══ 251. Message DFIPD212 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager's adapter hardware failed. Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter hardware failed, and the adapter is no longer attached to the LAN segment. This message is an alert and is followed by the adapter closed message. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host. This message is logged with the following data: 1. Adapter address 2. LAN segment number 3. Adapter number 4. Adapter check status as defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference for adapter checks. This consists of the adapter reason code and three parameters. Action: Run the adapter diagnostics on LAN Network Manager's adapter. If the diagnostics indicate that the adapter is operational and you still get this message, record the data section of the message. Consult the License Information in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation and contact your service supplier as defined in the Statement of Service. ═══ 252. Message DFIPD213 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager's adapter interface failed. Meaning: The adapter interface code failed, and LAN Network Manager's adapter has been removed from the LAN segment. This failure is most often related to the arrangement of the device driver statements in your CONFIG.SYS. The failure could also be due to a mismatch between the adapter interface code and the adapter microcode. This message is an alert and is logged if LAN Network Manager's adapter detects a hardware (adapter interface) error. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host. This message is followed by the adapter closed message. For other errors (such as, internal software errors), the LAN Network Manager program displays an abend message with abend codes and terminates. This message is logged with the following data: 1. Adapter address 2. LAN segment number 3. Adapter number 4. Error Code 5. Error Data/ID 6. Exception Type 7. CCB Return code The exception type indicates whether this was caused by a System Action Exception (1) or a PC System Detected Error (2). The Error data/ID and Error code fields have different meanings depending on the exception type. The CCB return code is the return code for the last READ command completed. For more information on this return code and these exception types, refer to the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference. Action: 1. Check your CONFIG.SYS file and verify that the LSM device driver statements are listed after all of the adapter interface device driver statements. To ensure that the device driver statements are listed in the correct order, it is recommended that all statements involving files in the heterogeneous LAN management and LAN Network Manager directories be moved to the end of the CONFIG.SYS. Restart the workstation. 2. If this message is displayed yet again, restart the workstation. 3. If this message continues to be displayed, run the diagnostics for your adapter. 4. If the adapter is good and the message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk by following the instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation. 5. If the problem is still not corrected, record the data section of the message. Consult the License Information in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation and contact your service supplier as defined in the Statement of Service. ═══ 253. Message DFIPD215 - Help ═══ Message Wire fault: LAN Network Manager's adapter or lobe failed. Meaning: A wire fault has caused this LAN Network Manager's adapter or lobe to fail. When this message is logged, the LAN segment status is Wire Fault. This message is an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a host, this alert is also sent to the host. Note: This message applies to Token-Ring Network adapters only. This message is logged with the following data: 1. LAN segment 2. Adapter address 3. Adapter number. Action: If you came from the problem determination procedures in the IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, return to the step that sent you here. If you did not, go to the Problem Determination Guide and use the symptom wire fault. ═══ 254. Message DFIPD218 - Help ═══ Message Ring not working: unable to open adapter. Meaning: The Token-Ring Network segment is beaconing while the LAN Network Manager adapter is trying to become active. The adapter cannot open. Action: Select Retry. The LAN Network Manager program will attempt to open the adapter again. If the Auto Retry on Beaconing option is active, this will be done automatically after the LAN Network Manager program waits for the retry interval specified on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. The LAN Network Manager program will attempt to reinsert on the ring for the user-specified number of retries. If the LAN Network Manager program is not able to insert on the ring after all retries, or if you select Cancel, the LAN Network Manager program will complete initialization and run with a limited set of functions on the beaconing ring. If beaconing persists, use the beacon information provided, or the Token-Ring diagnostics or another LAN Network Manager program that is active and can communicate with the ring to locate the source of beaconing. ═══ 255. Message DFIPD219 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not found: limited function available. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot find its own adapter or its adapter code. This is an initialization error. Action: Check the current adapter being used to determine whether the LAN Network Manager program is using the primary or alternate adapter. Verify that the adapter being used by the LAN Network Manager program corresponds with the adapter defined in the IEEE 802.2 feature profile. If you are using OS/2 1.3, the IEEE 802.2 profile is one of the LAN feature profiles in the OS/2 Communications Manager program. If you are using OS/2 with ES 1.0, first select LAN Adapter and Protocol support, then select Configure Workstation in the OS/2 Communications Manager program. If the adapter number matches, make sure you have configured the Communications Manager program for LAN communications (IBM Token-Ring Network or IBM PC Network). If the problem persists, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk by following the instructions in the LAN Network Manager documentation. ═══ 256. Message DFIPD222 - Help ═══ Message Remove Adapter command received. Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter has been removed from the LAN segment because another LAN Network Manager program or a user at this LAN Network Manager program issued a command to remove this adapter. This message is an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host. This message is logged when the LAN Network Manager program de-inserts from the network following receipt of a Remove Force frame on a Token-Ring Network or a Remove Station on a PC Network. This message is logged with the following data: 1. LAN segment number 2. LAN Network Manager's adapter address 3. Source address. Action: Consult your network administrator. Wait at least six minutes before you try again to restart the LAN Network Manager program on the LAN segment. This message could be received if this LAN Network Manager program is not defined as an authorized station for another LAN Network Manager program on the same domain and the other LAN Network Manager program has security active with the remove option on. ═══ 257. Message DFIPD226 - Help ═══ Message Adapter inoperative. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager adapter is inoperative (closed or beaconing), and you are using a LAN Network Manager function that requires communication on the LAN segment, such as link bridge. Action: Look at the event log to determine whether the adapter is closed or the ring is beaconing. Look for an event that indicates whether the local segment is inoperative or the LAN Network Manager adapter was closed or could not be opened. Follow the instructions for that event. ═══ 258. Message DFIPD232 - Help ═══ Message Unable to confirm adapter removal. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has sent a frame to a bridge requesting that the bridge remove an adapter. The bridge should have issued a force remove command to the adapter, then queried the adapter to confirm the removal and sent a response to the LAN Network Manager program indicating if the remove was successful or not. The LAN Network Manager program did not receive a response from the bridge within a fixed period of time. This may be due to a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager and the bridge or a problem in the bridge. Action: Verify that all bridge links are operational and all segments that could be in the path from the LAN Network Manager program to the station are functioning. Correct any errors and retry the operation. ═══ 259. Message DFIPD236 - Help ═══ Message Adapter transmit buffer must be at least 344 bytes. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open the adapter because the transmit buffer size is less than 344 bytes. Action: Access the IEEE 802.2 profile (one of the LAN feature profiles in the OS/2 Communications Manager program) and increase the buffer size. ═══ 260. Message DFIPD237 - Help ═══ Message Insufficient resources to open Service Access Point. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open the service access point (SAP) because there are not 5 SAPs available. Action: Access the IEEE 802.2 profile (one of the LAN feature profiles in the OS/2 Communications Manager program) and increase the number of SAPs. Allow 5 SAPs for the LAN Network Manager program, in addition to any that other applications use. ═══ 261. Message DFIPD240 - Help ═══ Message Invalid adapter address. Meaning: The adapter address that you entered is either a functional address or a group address, or it is not a full 12-digit hexadecimal address. If you entered more than one adapter address on the panel, the position of the cursor indicates the address that is incorrect. Action: Enter a 12-digit hexadecimal address that is not a functional or group address. ═══ 262. Message DFIPD241 - Help ═══ Message Adapter name not found. Meaning: You specified an adapter name that is not in the station definition table. You might have misspelled the adapter name or you might have entered an address that is not a valid 12-digit address. If you entered more than one adapter name, the position of the cursor indicates the name that is incorrect. Action: Verify the spelling of the name or the adapter address against the information in the Stations window. If it does not appear in the list of defined stations, it will have to be defined. ═══ 263. Message DFIPD242 - Help ═══ Message Adapter address not found. Meaning: The adapter address that you entered has not been found. If you receive this message from Configuration List, the adapter was not found on that segment. If you receive this message from the Stations window, the adapter was not found on any segment, nor does it have a definition. Action: Verify the adapter address and resubmit the request. ═══ 264. Message DFIPD243 - Help ═══ Message Name and address cannot be changed simultaneously. Meaning: You tried to change an adapter name and its address at the same time. You can only change the name assigned to the existing adapter address. Action: Reset the dialog to the initial values and change the name but not the address. ═══ 265. Message DFIPD244 - Help ═══ Message Invalid adapter name. Meaning: The adapter name that you entered is not valid. An adapter name is 1 to 16 characters that can be alphanumeric, @, #, $ and %. The name can contain any combination of letters and numbers with the following exception: it cannot be 12 alphanumeric characters that are a combination of numbers and the letters A-F, to prevent confusion with the hexadecimal adapter address. Action: Verify the spelling of the name against the information in the Stations window, and resubmit the request. ═══ 266. Message DFIPD245 - Help ═══ Message This adapter name already exists. Meaning: You entered an adapter name that is already assigned to another adapter address. Action: Enter a unique adapter name. ═══ 267. Message DFIPD246 - Help ═══ Message This adapter already has a name. Meaning: You entered a name for an adapter that already has a name assigned. Action: Use Change definition to change the existing adapter definition. ═══ 268. Message DFIPD247 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not found. Meaning: You specified an adapter that is not active on the specified LAN segment at the time of request. If no LAN segment was specified, the adapter is not active in the network. A profile is displayed for this adapter with the data from the LAN Network Manager database. Action: None ═══ 269. Message DFIPD249 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not found in configuration list. Meaning: You initiated a search for an adapter that does not exist in the LAN Segment Configuration List. You might have misspelled the adapter name or address. Action: Verify the adapter name or the adapter address against the information in the Stations window. ═══ 270. Message DFIPD251 - Help ═══ Message Invalid segment number. Meaning: You entered a segment number that is not valid. A LAN segment number must be three hexadecimal digits. Action: Enter a valid LAN segment number that is three hexadecimal digits. ═══ 271. Message DFIPD252 - Help ═══ Message Segment not found. Meaning: The segment that the adapter is on does not have a bridge in session with the LAN Network Manager program. Action: Check the status of the bridge, and link the bridge again, if necessary. ═══ 272. Message DFIPD253 - Help ═══ Message Invalid bridge name. Meaning: You entered an invalid bridge name in a bridge definition. A bridge name is 1-8 characters that can be alphanumeric, @, #, $ and %. However, the character string UNKNOWN is not a valid bridge name. Action: Correct the bridge name, and resubmit the request. ═══ 273. Message DFIPD254 - Help ═══ Message Bridge name not found. Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is not in the bridge definition table. You might have misspelled the bridge name. Action: Verify the spelling of the name or the adapter address against the information in the Bridges window. If it does not appear in the list of defined bridges, it will have to be defined. ═══ 274. Message DFIPD255 - Help ═══ Message Duplicate bridge name. Meaning: You entered a bridge name that is already assigned to another bridge. Action: Enter a unique bridge name. ═══ 275. Message DFIPD256 - Help ═══ Message Unable to communicate with specified LAN segment. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program is unable to communicate with the LAN segment you specified. The LAN segment is experiencing errors (such as a beacon or a continuous carrier) or the LAN Network Manager program is not linked to the target segment. Action: Determine the current status of the segment. ═══ 276. Message DFIPD262 - Help ═══ Message Invalid data. Please try again. Meaning: The data that you entered is not valid input. Action: Use the online help to determine acceptable values. ═══ 277. Message DFIPD263 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed: data query from LSM unsuccessful. Meaning: The operation could not be completed due to an error in the data query from LAN Station Manager. Action: Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed an running in the workstation. Then, resubmit the request. ═══ 278. Message DFIPD266 - Help ═══ Message Function not valid for this segment type. Meaning: You attempted to perform an operation that cannot be performed on the type of the segment specified. Action: Make sure you have selected a segment of the proper type. ═══ 279. Message DFIPD280 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed: no communication response received. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program sent a frame to a station that did not respond within a fixed time. Action: Determine the current status of the LAN Network Manager program. If the status is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you attempt the request again. Look at the event log and look for any alerts for any LAN segments in the path to that station. If any LAN segments in the path are experiencing problems, follow the instructions for those alerts. If necessary, go to the IBM Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide or the IBM PC Network Hardware Maintenance and Service to perform problem determination on any LAN segment that is not operating normally. If the status is normal, then resubmit the request. If this problem persists, increase the response timeout value on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. This timeout value is used only for communications with a remote segment. ═══ 280. Message DFIPD281 - Help ═══ Message Adapter present but not responding. Meaning: The destination adapter is on the LAN segment but is not responding to the LAN Network Manager program queries. Action: The adapter might be congested. Resubmit the request. If the adapter is congested, you might also receive an alert (DFIPD107) when you resubmit the request. ═══ 281. Message DFIPD282 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed: link busy. Meaning: The bridge is congested and cannot respond to the LAN Network Manager command. Action: Resubmit the request. If you resubmit the request, you might also receive an alert (DFIPD188) indicating that the bridge is congested. ═══ 282. Message DFIPD284 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed: out of resources. Meaning: All the LAN Network Manager buffers are in use or the LAN Network Manager program status is Data Lost. The LAN Network Manager program cannot complete the operation. Action: Determine the current status of the LAN Network Manager program. If the status is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you attempt the operation again. If the status is Normal, all of the adapter buffers are in use. Wait momentarily and then resubmit the request. ═══ 283. Message DFIPD285 - Help ═══ Message Bridge already linked. Meaning: You tried to link to a bridge that already has a communication link established. Action: None ═══ 284. Message DFIPD286 - Help ═══ Message Bridge already unlinked. Meaning: You tried to take down the link to a bridge that does not have a communication link established. Action: None ═══ 285. Message DFIPD289 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed: bridge not linked. Meaning: You requested a bridge function (such as a bridge profile) for a bridge with which the LAN Network Manager program has not established a communication link. The bridge name might be undefined or you might have misspelled the name. Action: Verify that the bridge is defined, the name is spelled correctly, and that the bridge is linked, then resubmit the request. ═══ 286. Message DFIPD296 - Help ═══ Message No bridge reporting for this Token-Ring Network segment. Meaning: You requested to view soft error reporting options or the segment status details for a remote Token-Ring Network segment, and no bridge is reporting for that ring. The LAN Network Manager program has lost communication with the reporting bridge and is unable to find another reporter for that segment. Action: Manual intervention might be required to recover the reporting bridge or another bridge might have to be linked to perform the reporting function. ═══ 287. Message DFIPD298 - Help ═══ Message Ring nnn is already set to full soft error reporting. Meaning: You requested full soft error reporting for a Token-Ring segment but full soft error reporting is already in effect for this LAN segment. The LAN segment (nnn) is identified in the message. Only one Token-Ring Network segment at a time can be in full soft error reporting mode. Action: Set the soft error reporting option to None for the segment that is currently in full soft error reporting, and then resubmit the command for the new segment. ═══ 288. Message DFIPD300 - Help ═══ Message Bridge failed to link. RC = nnn. Meaning: The bridge failed to link on operator request (link bridge function) during the LAN Network Manager program initialization, or during an automatic bridge link. If a bridge fails to link during initialization, this message and the associated bridge name and reason code are placed into the Events Log. This message is displayed with a reason code (nnn) that identifies the cause of the failure. The meaning and actions for the reason codes are as follows: 002 One of the adapter addresses in the LAN Network Manager bridge definition is incorrect. Action: Verify the bridge adapter addresses. 003 The reporting link password is incorrect. Action: Verify the password for the LAN Network Manager reporting link against the password in the bridge program's configuration. 004 Another LAN Network Manager program is already linked to the bridge with the reporting link that you are requesting. Action: Use a different reporting link to link to the bridge, or contact your network administrator. 005 One or both of the adapter addresses in the bridge definition are incorrect, or the bridge did not respond within the fixed time period. Note: If there is an IBM 8209 Bridge, or compatible bridge that uses transparent bridging, between the LAN Network Manager program and the bridge to which you are attempting to link, you may need to upgrade the bridge program. Action: Try to establish the link again. If the timeout recurs, go to the Bridges window and verify the addresses, then try again. If the timeout still occurs, go to the Event Log to determine the status of the network. If the timeout still occurs, try increasing the Response Timeout value on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. 006 No data link buffers are available to set up the link. Action: If the LAN Network Manager program status is Data lost, wait until that status has recovered and then retry the operation. Otherwise, wait momentarily and retry the operation. 007 The bridge program rejected the LAN Network Manager request for a reason other than a wrong password or the link already in use. Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot establish the link, the bridge is not compatible with the LAN Network Manager program. 008 The bridge table is full. The maximum number of bridge links are already established. Action: To establish a link with this bridge, first take down the link to another bridge. 009 The segment table is full. Your linking sequence contains more than 65 LAN segments that do not already have other bridges linked to the LAN Network Manager program. Action: To establish a link to this bridge, take down the link to another bridge. Change your linking sequence to a logical orderly progression along each path. 010-014 The bridge detected an error in a LAN Network Manager frame, or the LAN Network Manager program received an invalid response from the bridge. Either the bridge is not a supported bridge, the bridge is faulty, or there is an error in the LAN Network Manager program. Action: Verify that the bridge program is one of the following: o IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version 1.1, Version 2.0, Version 2.1, Version 2.2 o IBM PC Network Bridge Program o IBM 8209 Bridge Program. If the bridge uses one of these, either the bridge program or the LAN Network Manager program is faulty. Contact your service supplier. 015 There are no more DLC link stations available to link to the bridge. Action: Verify that there are enough DLC link stations requested to link to all bridges. If there are not, increase the number of DLC link stations requested for next startup or restart and restart the LAN Network Manager program. If the number obtained is less than the number requested, another application may be using the link stations that LAN Network Manager needs. Either close the other application or reconfigure the other application to use fewer links. Examples of applications which may be using link stations are Remote Data Services, NETBIOS, and Host Communications via Network Adapter (check the DLC profile under the SNA feature profiles). 016 The LAN Network Manager program is already attempting to establish a link with this bridge. The link request might have been initiated by the LAN Network Manager operator, the NetView operator, or the autolink bridge function task. Action: Check the current status of the bridge. If the status is Not linked, wait and refresh the list again. If the status remains Not linked, try to link to the bridge again. You may need to wait at least twice the remote response timeout for an outstanding request to complete before the link request will be accepted. You will continue to get message DFIPD300, return code 016, until the current link attempt has completed. 017 An error has occurred while accessing or updating the bridge definition. Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot establish the link, delete the bridge definition and redefine the bridge and retry the operation. 018 The LAN Network Manager is currently attempting to link to a bridge with the same address as one address of the bridge you are trying to link. Link requests to bridges that have duplicate addresses must be serialized. Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. 019 LAN Network Manager is currently linked to a bridge that has the same adapter address or addresses as this bridge definition. All bridges to which LAN Network Manager is linked must have unique adapter addresses. Action: Unlink the currently linked bridge then either resubmit the request or change the adapter adresses and resubmit the request. 099 An error other than those described above occurred. Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot establish the link, contact your service supplier. ═══ 289. Message DFIPD356 - Help ═══ Message Bus inoperative: No carrier. Meaning: If the problem is on LAN Network Manager's segment, a cable located between the LAN Network Manager station and the translator unit is loose or broken. The problem could also be in the translator unit, such as a loss of power. If the problem is on a remote LAN segment, the bridge cable may be loose or broken, or there may be a problem with the translator unit on that LAN segment. This message is also an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host. This message is logged with the following data: 1. LAN segment number 2. Locally administered address of adapter that detects the no-carrier condition 3. Universally administered address of the adapter that detects the no-carrier condition. Action: Check to see if the cable from the LAN Network Manager station to the network cabling is loose. If not, then follow your establishment's procedure for locating and fixing the loose or broken cable, or fixing the translator unit. ═══ 290. Message DFIPD367 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not found on network or not responding. Meaning: You specified an adapter that either is not present, not active in the network, or has no buffer space available to receive messages. A profile is displayed for this adapter with the data from the LAN Network Manager database. Action: Verify the adapter name or address. ═══ 291. Message DFIPD401 - Help ═══ Message Database initialization error. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will be ended because the LAN Network Manager database could not be initialized. Action: View the DFIERROR.LOG in the LM11 directory for a log of all SQL errors. ═══ 292. Message DFIPD402 - Help ═══ Message Error loading resources. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will be not be started because the dynamic link library DFIITRES.DLL could not be loaded. Action: Do the following: 1. Restart the workstation. 2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program. 4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 293. Message DFIPD403 - Help ═══ Message Error starting internal process/threads. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because it could not start its internal processes or threads. Action: Do the following: 1. Restart the workstation. 2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 3. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 294. Message DFIPD404 - Help ═══ Message Error starting the user interface. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because neither of the executable files (DFIGTMN.EXE or DFIGIMN.EXE) could be loaded. The file could not be loaded because of one of the following: o The format of the file was bad. o The file was not found. o There is not enough memory in your workstation. Action: Do the following: 1. Restart the workstation. 2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program. 4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 295. Message DFIPD406 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to hop count/single-route broadcast. Meaning: You have requested to change the hop-count or the single-route broadcast parameter. If you change a single-route broadcast setting while the single-route broadcast mode is Automatic, the mode will be changed to Manual. This might disrupt normal activity by preventing users from establishing some sessions. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 296. Message DFIPD407 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to numbers or frame forwarding. Meaning: You have requested to change a LAN segment number, change the bridge number, or stop forwarding frames. This might disrupt normal network activity by ending user and LAN Network Manager sessions through this bridge. If you change the LAN segment numbers or bridge number, you must re-link all LAN Network Manager programs currently linked to this bridge. Also, you might have to reconfigure other bridges on the affected LAN segment to maintain network integrity. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 297. Message DFIPD408 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to link password. Meaning: You have requested to change one or more passwords for reporting links 1 through 3 of the bridge. This will prevent other LAN Network Manager programs from linking to the bridge until their reporting link passwords are also changed. Action: To proceed, select OK. Update the LAN Network Manager programs that are authorized to link to the bridge with the new password. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 298. Message DFIPD409 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to link 0 password. Meaning: You have requested to change the password for reporting link 0 of this bridge. This will prevent this LAN Network Manager program from re-linking to the bridge until you change the reporting link password in this LAN Network Manager program. Action: To proceed, select OK. Change the password on the Bridge Parameters window to match this password and restart the LAN Network Manager program before you re-link to the bridge. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 299. Message DFIPD410 - Help ═══ Message Confirm setting performance notification interval to n. Meaning: You have requested to change the performance notification interval to n; where n is the interval indicated in this message. The bridge performance counters will be logged in the database table LANM.BRIDGE_PERFORMANCE every n minutes. Logging continues until the notification interval is set to 0. The notification interval is saved in the bridge definition table and will be reapplied if the bridge link is lost and re-established. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 300. Message DFIPD411 - Help ═══ Message Confirm setting performance notification interval to 0. Meaning: You have requested to change the performance notification interval to 0. The bridge performance counters will not be logged in the database table LANM.BRIDGE_PERFORMANCE. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 301. Message DFIPD412 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to percent frames lost threshold. Meaning: You have requested to change the threshold for bridge performance notifications. The bridge will send a performance notification if the number of frames discarded exceeds the threshold you requested. Frames are typically discarded due to errors or heavy traffic. The recommended value for this field is 3%. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 302. Message DFIPD415 - Help ═══ Message Segment status details not available. Meaning: You have selected to view status details for a segment that is not in a beaconing, soft error, or continuous carrier condition. Status details for segments that are not in one of these conditions are not available. Action: None. ═══ 303. Message DFIPD418 - Help ═══ Message Manual resync failed to complete because LAN Network Manager did not receive response from adapter nnnnnnnnnnnn. Meaning: A manual resynchronization of a Token-Ring Network segment has failed because the LAN Network Manager program did not receive a response for the adapter whose address is displayed. Possible causes of this are: o The adapter whose address is displayed is congested and is not responding. Therefore the LAN Network Manager program does not know the adapter's NAUN which is needed to continue. o There may be a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager program and the bridge used to query the adapter. o The bridge used to query the adapter is busy or not responding. o The bridge used to query the adapter does not have the CRS function enabled, which is needed for this function. Action: This may be a temporary condition. To determine the status of the segment and the adapter, do the following: 1. Ensure that the configuration list display is sorted in upstream order (the default for Sort by). 2. Use Find to locate the adapter address in the configuration list. Note: The adapters listed before this adapter in the list display a status confirmed by the resync before the resync failed. Those after it in the list display their last known status since the resync process could not reach them. 3. Query the adapter to determine its status. If the query is successful, then retry the manual resync. Otherwise, use the diagnostic information provided by the query to determine how to correct the failing adapter. ═══ 304. Message DFIPD419 - Help ═══ Message Manual resync failed to complete because LAN Network Manager did not receive response from bridge nnnnnnnn. Meaning: A manual resync of a PC Network (CSMA/CD) segment has failed because the LAN Network Manager program did not receive a response from the bridge whose name is displayed. Possible causes of this are: o The bridge whose name is displayed is congested and is not responding. o There may be a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager program and the bridge providing the configuration list. o The bridge whose name is displayed does not have the LAN Error Monitor function enabled, which is needed for this function. Action: Query the bridge to determine its status. If the query is successful, then retry the manual resync. Otherwise, use the diagnostic information provided by the query to determine how to correct the failing bridge. ═══ 305. Message DFIPD420 - Help ═══ Message Error allocating memory for internal threads/processes. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because it could not allocate enough memory to start its internal processes or threads. Action: Do the following: 1. Restart the workstation. 2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 3. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 306. Message DFIPD421 - Help ═══ Message The field is invalid. Meaning: The data entered for the field is not valid. Action: Select Help for the field in error. ═══ 307. Message DFIPD422 - Help ═══ Message Cannot find details for selected event/alert. Meaning: The details requested for the event or alert do not exist in the event log. Action: None ═══ 308. Message DFIPD423 - Help ═══ Message No events match defined view. Meaning: There are no events in the event log that match the conditions that you defined for the event log view. Action: Verify the search criteria and re-submit the request. ═══ 309. Message DFIPD424 - Help ═══ Message Database operation failed. Consult OS/2 EE Database Manager Programming Guide and Reference Volume 2. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program was unable to access a database table. The Structured Query Language (SQL) error is displayed in the message box and is also logged in \LM11\DFIERROR.LOG. Action: Read the OS/2 Database Manager Programming Guide and Reference Volume 2 for more information on the specific error. If a recovery or restart is advised, restart the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 310. Message DFIPD426 - Help ═══ Message Bridge not found in current view. Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is in the database, but the bridge is not in the current view. Therefore, the bridge cannot be displayed. Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request. ═══ 311. Message DFIPD425 - Help ═══ Message Bridge not found Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is not in the database. Action: Verify the bridge name, and resubmit the request. ═══ 312. Message DFIPD427 - Help ═══ Message Adapter information note in database: no data to display. Meaning: You selected an adapter that is not in the database. The adapter has aged out of the configuration or the definition table and cannot be queried. If the adapter reenters the network, the LAN Network Manager program will add it to the configuration list. If a definition existed for the station, you must enter it again. Action: When the adapter reenters the network, add a definition for the station. You can then query the adapter. ═══ 313. Message DFIPD430 - Help ═══ Message Maximum number of bridges have been defined. Meaning: You cannot add this bridge definition. The maximum number of bridges (2000) have already been defined. Action: Delete any unnecessary bridge definitions. ═══ 314. Message DFIPD431 - Help ═══ Message Bridge autolink limit exceeded. Meaning: You have requested an automatic link for this bridge. The maximum number of bridges are already defined with automatic link for the number of DLC link stations that are available. The autolink will occur when a link station becomes available. Action: Increase the number of DLC link stations and restart the LAN Network Manager program. Make sure that the number of link stations specified in the OS/2 Communications Manager LAN feature profiles is equal to or greater than the number requested by the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 315. Message DFIPD432 - Help ═══ Message Interval changed to 1 minute:bridge upgrade needed Meaning: You have requested to set the performance interval to an interval greater than one minute. The bridge program that you are using requires an upgrade to report performance counters over an interval greater than one minute. The performance interval has been reset to one minute. Action: To use the full capability of this function, use the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program, Version 2.1 or 2.2, or the latest PTF for the IBM PC Network Bridge Program. ═══ 316. Message DFIPD433 - Help ═══ Message Confirm request to reset Controlled Access Unit. Meaning: You have requested to reset an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit. This might disrupt the network activity of adapters on the CAU or activity through any bridges on the CAU. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 317. Message DFIPD434 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not in current view. Meaning: You specified an adapter name or address that is in the database, but the adapter is not in the current view. Therefore, the adapter cannot be displayed. Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request. ═══ 318. Message DFIPD435 - Help ═══ Message Adapter address not found in configuration table. Meaning: You requested the adapter profile for an adapter that is no longer in the configuration table. It has aged out, and the profile data is not available. Action: The adapter must reenter the network before the function will work. ═══ 319. Message DFIPD450 - Help ═══ Message Confirm request to reconfigure LAN segment. Meaning: You have requested to force the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit to wrap. This will reconfigure the LAN segment and might disrupt normal network activity. Network integrity might not be maintained. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 320. Message DFIPD451 - Help ═══ Message Confirm request to disable. Meaning: You have requested to disable a Lobe Attachment Module (LAM) or lobe receptacle of an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit. This might disrupt normal network activity. Network integrity might not be maintained. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 321. Message DFIPD453 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager will attempt to reestablish the link. Meaning: You have requested an unlink to a bridge for which autolink is set to Yes. After the unlink completes, the LAN Network Manager program will attempt to reestablish the link. You can change the autolink setting from the Bridge Definition window. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 322. Message DFIPD454 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not in current view. Meaning: You have requested an adapter that does not have a station definition. This view displays only defined adapters. Action: Change the View to All undefined and resubmit the request. ═══ 323. Message DFIPD455 - Help ═══ Message Adapter not in current view. Meaning: You have requested an adapter that has a station definition. This view displays only undefined adapters. Action: Change the View to All defined and resubmit the request. ═══ 324. Message DFIPD456 - Help ═══ Message Bridge parameters could not be set for the listed reason. RC=. Meaning: Your request to change parameters in a bridge has failed. Each parameter that is not set is listed followed by a code that indicates the reason for the failure. The meaning and action for the reason codes are as follows: 1 Unknown Action: Wait momentarily then resubmit the request. 2 No communication response was received within a fixed time. Action: Wait momentarily, then display the bridge profile to verify the changes. If the profile does not indicate the changed information, resubmit the request to change the bridge parameter. 3 The link is busy. The bridge is too busy to respond to the LAN Network Manager program. Action: Wait momentarily then resubmit the request. 4 The LAN Network Manager program is out of resources. The operation cannot be completed because all of the LAN Network Manager buffers are in use. Action: Wait momentarily then resubmit the request. 5 The bridge is not linked. The LAN Network Manager program does not have a communication link established with the bridge. Action: Link to the bridge then resubmit the request. 6 You have requested to set the performance interval to an interval greater than one minute. The bridge program that you are using requires an upgrade to report performance counters over an interval greater than one minute. The performance interval has been reset to one minute. Action: To use the full capability of this function, use the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge program, Version 2.1 or 2.2, or the PTF for the IBM PC Network Bridge program. 7 This parameter is not supported by the bridge. Action: None. 8 Frame error. A frame error occurred while performing the requested function because a frame was not constructed properly (it does not conform to the published frame architecture), the target bridge does not recognize the command (because of an earlier version of software in the bridge), or the target bridge cannot process the command (because of an internal error). Action: None. ═══ 325. Message DFIPD457 - Help ═══ Message Bridge unlink completed successfully. Meaning: The request to unlink the bridge has completed successfully. This message is logged with the bridge name. Action: None. ═══ 326. Message DFIPD458 - Help ═══ Message Bridge link completed successfully. Meaning: The request to link the bridge has completed successfully. This message is logged with the bridge name. Action: None. ═══ 327. Message DFIPD463 - Help ═══ Message Adapter removed successfully. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has removed the adapter and queried it to ensure that it is no longer active. The adapter will be made inactive in the configuration list. The definition (if any) will remain in the database. Action: None. ═══ 328. Message DFIPD468 - Help ═══ Message Unable to initialize the adapter for Remote Program Update. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager adapter failed the initialization attempt by the Remote Program Update process. The process was not started and this LAN Network Manager program will not provide remote program updates. This message is logged with the following data: 1. Adapter address 2. Adapter number 3. Adapter command 4. CCB return code as defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference. Action: Display the event details for this message in the LAN Network Manager Event Log. Record the adapter command and CCB return code values. Refer to the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference for explanation, cause, and action for the return code. After correcting the problem, restart the LAN Network Manager program to activate the Remote Program Update process. ═══ 329. Message DFIPD470 - Help ═══ Message Duplicate filter defined. Meaning: You requested to add a filter. A filter is already defined with the same Alert ID, Resource name, and Alert type, but with a different Pass/Block value. Action: To change the Pass/Block value, return to the Alert Filter window, select the filter, then select Change filter. ═══ 330. Message DFIPD471 - Help ═══ Message Error loading DLL. Meaning: There is an error in loading the dynamic link library for the User-defined alert filter. The file could not be loaded because of one of the following: o The Dynamic link library field was blank. o The format of the file was bad. o The file was not found. o There is not enough memory in your workstation. o You are using the SYSP SET command to activate a filter that has not yet been defined. Action: Do the following: 1. Verify that the DLL is in the LM11 directory, or in another directory specified in the LIBPATH statement of your CONFIG.SYS. 2. Verify that the DLL name specified matches the DLL name in the LM11 directory. 3. If you are using the SYSP SET command to activate a filter, ensure that that filter exists. 4. Recompile the DLL, and ensure that there are no errors. Use the sample alert filter routine (DFIEXALF) in the LM11 directory as an example. 5. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 6. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 331. Message DFIPD472 - Help ═══ Message Routine not found. Meaning: There is an error in getting the user-defined alert filter procedure (routine) address. Action: Do the following: 1. Verify that the routine name that appears on the Alert Filters window matches the routine name in the User Filter dynamic link library. 2. Verify that the routine is defined to be externally visible so that the LAN Network Manager program can access it. Use the sample alert filter routine (DFIEXALF) in the LM11 directory as an example. 3. Recompile the DLL, and ensure that there are no errors. 4. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. ═══ 332. Message DFIPD474 - Help ═══ Message filename.EXE is not a stand-alone executable file. Meaning: The file you specified is not a stand-alone executable file. Action: To start the LAN Network Manager program, refer to the LAN Network Manager User's Guide. ═══ 333. Message DFIPD475 - Help ═══ Message Confirm request for program update enable. Meaning: You have requested to enable an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit for program update. The CAU is disabled while the microcode is being loaded. This can take several minutes. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 334. Message DFIPD476 - Help ═══ Message Number of stations exceeds window display size. Meaning: The Station List will not display all the stations for the requested segment. The number of stations in the database exceeds the number of stations that the Station List can display (2000). Action: Do one of the following: o Select a view that limits the stations displayed. o Delete unnecessary definitions. ═══ 335. Message DFIPD477 - Help ═══ Message Another logon is in progress. Meaning: You are attempting to log on while User Profile Management Services is processing another logon. Action: Complete or cancel the other logon, then resubmit the request. ═══ 336. Message DFIPD478 - Help ═══ Message Cannot allocate memory for logon function. Meaning: User Profile Management Services reported an out-of-memory error. Action: Increase the available memory (or hard disk swapper space) and resubmit the request. ═══ 337. Message DFIPD479 - Help ═══ Message The user ID is not in the LANETMGR group or the LANETMGR group does not exist. Meaning: The user ID that you entered is not in the group ID LANETMGR or the group ID does not exist in User Profile Management Services. Action: Ensure that the group ID LANETMGR is listed on the User Profile Management Services window. Ensure that the user ID is listed in the group. If the group ID or the user ID does not exist, add it through User Profile Management Services. ═══ 338. Message DFIPD480 - Help ═══ Message Password incorrect. Meaning: The logon has failed because the password is not correct. Action: Log on with the correct password. ═══ 339. Message DFIPD481 - Help ═══ Message n bridge(s) have been defined as autolink. At least this many DLC Link Stations must be defined for next start-up or restart. Meaning: You have requested fewer DLC link stations to be available at the next start-up of the LAN Network Manager program than the number of bridges defined as autolink bridges. Action: Do one of the following: o Change the number of DLC link stations to a value that is at least as large as the number of autolink bridges to ensure that the LAN Network Manager program can link to all of the bridges at the same time. o Change some of the bridge definitions from Autolink=Yes to Autolink=No if those links are not needed. ═══ 340. Message DFIPD482 - Help ═══ Message Controlled Access Unit not found in current view. Meaning: You specified an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit that is in the database, but the CAU is not in the current view. Therefore, the CAU cannot be displayed. Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request. If the View is already All, select Refresh. ═══ 341. Message DFIPD483 - Help ═══ Message CAU ID not found. Meaning: The ID of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit that you entered is not known by the LAN Network Manager program. The ID might have been typed incorrectly, or the LAN Network Manager program might not be able to communicate with the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit Action: On the Controlled Access Units window (with View set to All), verify the ID and status of the CAU. ═══ 342. Message DFIPD484 - Help ═══ Message Delete definition is not permitted for a registered CAU. One or more CAUs selected is registered. Meaning: You requested to delete the definition of one or more Controlled Access Units that are currently registered with this LAN Network Manager. Action: Deregister the selected Controlled Access Units, and resubmit the request. ═══ 343. Message DFIPD485 - Help ═══ Message Duplicate Controlled Access Unit. Meaning: You requested to add a definition for an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit that is already defined. Action: To change the definition of the CAU, select the CAU then select Change from the Action pull-down. ═══ 344. Message DFIPD486 - Help ═══ Message The LAN Network Manager adapter is not opened. LAN Network Manager will operate in a limited mode. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open its adapter and, therefore, will operate in a limited mode. Network functions such as link bridge and network status display of local and remote LAN segments will not be available. Action: View the ACSLAN.LOG log file in the directory CMLIB to determine why the LAN Network Manager program could not open the adapter. If you are running on OS/2 2.0, this file is called LANTRAN.LOG and is located in the IBMCOM directory. To exit from the LAN Network Manager program, select Exit from the System pull-down on the LAN Network Manager main window. ═══ 345. Message DFIPD487 - Help ═══ Message Updates completed successfully. All LAN Network Managers linked to this bridge must be re-linked. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has updated a LAN segment number, the bridge number, or has stopped frame forwarding in a bridge. This might disrupt normal network activity by ending user and LAN Network Manager sessions through this bridge. Action: Relink all LAN Network Manager programs that were previously linked to this bridge. ═══ 346. Message DFIPD488 - Help ═══ Message No adapters match the view defined. Meaning: There are no adapters in the database that meet the conditions defined for the adapter view. Action: If View is set to All defined, change the View to All undefined. If View is set to All undefined, change the View to All defined. ═══ 347. Message DFIPD489 - Help ═══ Message No bridges match the view defined. Meaning: There are no bridges in the database that meet the conditions defined for the bridges view. Action: If View is set to All, no bridges are defined. If View is set to Some, change the view criteria. ═══ 348. Message DFIPD490 - Help ═══ Message No Controlled Access Units match the view defined. Meaning: There are no Controlled Access Units in the database that meet the conditions defined for the CAUs view. Action: If View is set to All, no CAUs are defined. If View is set to Some, change the view criteria. ═══ 349. Message DFIPD491 - Help ═══ Message No segments match the view defined. Meaning: There are no segments in the database that meet the conditions defined for the segments view. Action: If View is set to All the LAN Network Manager program is not in communication with any segments. If View is set to Some, change the view criteria. ═══ 350. Message DFIPD494 - Help ═══ Message Unable to initialize station management support. Meaning: The Service Interface to the Station Manager code failed. This failure can prevent the LAN Network Manager program from communicating with an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit or with LAN Station Manager in a target station. This message is logged with a reason code that identifies the cause of failure: 13 Error opening LAN adapter. The number of users defined in the IEEE 802.2 profile could be too low. Action: Increase the number of users. 80 Unexpected OS/2 error detected. Action: If the error persists, contact your Service Representative. Restart the system. 83 Device driver open failed Action: Verify that the DEVICE= statement in CONFIG.SYS specifies the correct path and name of the Station Manager device driver. Also the LAN Adapter support software must be installed and loaded prior to Station Manager. If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk using the instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation. 8D Station Manager device driver error Action: Verify that the DEVICE= statement in CONFIG.SYS specifies the correct path and name of the Station Manager device driver. If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk using the instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation. 14 Out of adapter resources Action: Change the configuration for the LAN Adapter Handler to increase resources, such as number of SAPs or reduce the number of applications that are using the LAN adapter simultaneously. Exit and Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 90 LSM internal error Action: If the error persists, contact your Service Representative. 99 Error locating HLMCP.DLL. LAN Network Manager cannot find the HLMCP.DLL. This DLL enables LAN Network Manager to communicate with LAN Station Manager in target workstations. Action: Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed on the LAN Network Manager workstation. other LAN Network Manager internal errors Action: 1. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. If this message recurs, continue with step 2. Otherwise, stop here. 2. If this message is displayed again, exit the LAN Network Manager program and start the LAN Network Manager program again. 3. If this message is displayed again, exit the LAN Network Manager program and restart the workstation. Then, start the LAN Network Manager program. 4. If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk using the instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation. 5. If the problem is still not corrected, record the data section of this message. Consult the License Information in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation and contact your service supplier defined in the Statement of Service. This message is logged with the following data: 1. LAN segment number 2. Adapter address 3. Adapter number 4. Command 5. Error reason code. Action: See the individual return codes. ═══ 351. Message DFIPD495 - Help ═══ Message A refresh of the bridge profile failed. Meaning: Communication with the bridge failed when you requested either to refresh the performance data on the Bridge profile window or change one of the associated dialogs (configuration parameters, reporting link parameters, or performance data). The Bridge profile window will be closed. Action: Attempt to redisplay the bridge profile to determine the cause of the communication failure. ═══ 352. Message DFIPD497 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager may be isolated from network; manual recovery required. Meaning: You have requested to disable the LAN Network Manager lobe receptacle or its lobe attachment module. The LAN Network Manager program will either be removed from the network or isolated from other devices on the network. You will have to restore the LAN Network Manager program to the network. Action: To proceed, select OK. To restore the LAN Network Manager program, do the following: 1. Use another LAN Network Manager program or a maintenance tool to restore the lobe receptacle or the lobe attachment module. 2. Restart the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit. ═══ 353. Message DFIPD498 - Help ═══ Message Database add or update failed. Meaning: An attempt to add or update a database table was unsuccessful. Action: Remove duplicate names and addresses from the appropriate database table. If you are adding or changing a station definition, remove any duplicates from the Station Definition Table and the Location Definition Table. If you are adding or changing a bridge definition, remove any duplicates from the Bridge Definition Table. If you are adding or changing a definition for an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit, remove any duplicates from the CAU Table. If you are adding or changing a CAU lobe definition, remove any duplicates from the CAU Lobe Location Table. ═══ 354. Message DFIPD499 - Help ═══ Message Confirm removal of LAN Network Manager's adapter; all network functions/applications will end. Meaning: You have requested to remove the LAN Network Manager adapter. The LAN Network Manager status will become Adapter Closed and all functions involving communications on the network will be disabled. In addition, any other LAN application running on this adapter (such as LAN Server/ Requester) will be interrupted or shut down. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 355. Message DFIPD520 - Help ═══ Message No events found. Meaning: No events exist in the event log for the criteria you specified for event list command. Action: None ═══ 356. Message DFIPD521 - Help ═══ Message Confirm new locally administered adapter address. Meaning: You have requested to change the Locally administered adapter address. This address overrides the universally administered address. Each address must be unique. An error will result when two or more adapters with the same address attempt to use the network. Action: After the configuration is finished you must unlink from the bridge, change the base adapter address to the new locally administered address in the bridge definition, restart the bridge and re-establish the link with the bridge. ═══ 357. Message DFIPD522 - Help ═══ Message Locally administered adapter address not unique. Meaning: The same adapter address was entered for both input fields in the panel. Locally administered adapter must always be unique address. The address value was probably mistyped. Action: Enter a different locally administered adapter address value. ═══ 358. Message DFIPD523 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to address range/criteria range filters. Meaning: You have requested to change the Address range and/or Criteria range filter definitions. Changes to these parameters alter the filtering characteristics of the bridge. Frames with source or destination address within the specified values defined by Address range filters are filtered (discarded) by the bridge. Frames will be filtered if the filtering information is greater than the high value of each range and less than the low value of each range defined by the Criteria range filter. Action: None ═══ 359. Message DFIPD524 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to forwarding parameters. Meaning: You have requested to change bridge Forwarding parameters. This may affect the Spanning Tree protocol calculation in a LAN to: o Determine which one of two or more parallel bridges between two LAN segments is active at any one time. o Detect when a bridge has left or entered the network, and readjust active bridges accordingly. o Determine the relative "length" of the path in the network between two LAN segments (path cost). Action: None ═══ 360. Message DFIPD525 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to TCP/IP and/or broadcast address conversion. Meaning: You have requested to change the TCP/IP address conversion and/or Broadcast address conversion. TCP/IP address conversion determines if the bit order of addresses within the I-field of ARP and RARP packets is to be reversed between the Token-Ring and Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN types. Broadcast address conversion determines if the bridge should convert the Token-Ring all-stations broadcast address in a frame to the Ethernet all-stations broadcast address. Changes to these parameters may cause the frames affected not being received by some stations. Action: None ═══ 361. Message DFIPD526 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to automatic mode selection, mode priority and/or forward LLC traffic. Meaning: You have requested to change Automatic mode selection, Mode priority and/or Forwarding LLC traffic. Automatic mode selection decides if the bridge should convert frames with the method determined by frame content when the frames are forwarded from Token-Ring to Ethernet/IEEE segments. If this parameter is disabled or if the destination type is unknown, all frames are converted according to the mode priority. If forward LLC traffic is enabled, the bridge will forward the LLC based protocol frames from Token-Ring to Ethernet. These frames will not be forwarded otherwise. Changes to these parameters may cause some of the frames to be undesirably forwarded or be converted into improper protocol. Action: None ═══ 362. Message DFIPD527 - Help ═══ Message Enabled SAPs address not unique. Meaning: Duplicate SAPs have been entered. The IEEE 802.2 SAPs for which traffic is forwarded when Forward LLC traffic is enabled must be unique. Action: Enter unique SAPs. ═══ 363. Message DFIPD528 - Help ═══ Message Confirm change to bridge database. Meaning: You have requested to delete entries in the bridge database. Once an entry is deleted in the bridge database, it cannot be recovered. Action: None ═══ 364. Message DFIPD529 - Help ═══ Message The bridge database could not be updated. Meaning: A command to update the specified database in a bridge has failed. The reason codes for the failure are: 1 Unknown. Action: Try again at a later time. 2 No communication response received within a fixed time. Action: Try again at a later time. 3 Link busy -- The bridge is too busy to respond. Action: Try again at a later time. 4 Out of resources -- The operation cannot be completed because all of LAN Network Manager's buffers were in use at the time of the request. Action: Try again at a later time. 5 Bridge not linked -- LAN Network Manager does not have a communication link established with the bridge. Action: Link to the bridge and try again. 6 Not used. Action: None 7 Parameter not supported by the bridge. Action: None 8 Frame error -- A frame may not have been constructed properly (it does not conform to the published frame architecture) and a frame error occurred while performing the requested function. This error can occur if the target bridge does not recognize the command (because of an earlier version of software in the bridge) or cannot process the command (because of an internal error). Action: None ═══ 365. Message DFIPD530 - Help ═══ Message Mapped address pair not found. Meaning: The mapped address pair selected for deletion was not found in the bridge mapped address database and, therefore, could not be deleted. Action: None ═══ 366. Message DFIPD531 - Help ═══ Message Low range value exceeds high range value. Meaning: In a filter definition, a low range value exceeds the corresponding high range value. Action: Re-define the filter range so that the low range is less than the high range. Start the bridge again. ═══ 367. Message DFIPD532 - Help ═══ Message Hello time must be less than the forward delay. Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning Tree parameters where the Hello time value exceeds the value of the Forward delay. Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Hello time and bridge Forward delay parameters, and enter the values again. ═══ 368. Message DFIPD533 - Help ═══ Message Forward delay must be less than the maximum age. Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning Tree parameters where the Forward delay value exceeds the value of the maximum age. Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Maximum age and bridge Forward delay parameters, and enter the values again. ═══ 369. Message DFIPD534 - Help ═══ Message Hello time must be less than the maximum age. Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning Tree parameters where the Hello time value exceeds the value of the Maximum age. Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Maximum age and bridge Hello time parameters, and enter the values again. ═══ 370. Message DFIPD535 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed - duplicate database entry. Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter an address or address pair that already exists within that respective database. Action: Verify the address or address pair that you are attempting to enter. If it already exists, continue with the next entry, if any. If your entry was incorrect, type the correct entry. ═══ 371. Message DFIPD536 - Help ═══ Message Maximum number of database entries reached. Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter, either from a panel or from a file, a number of database entries that exceed the maximum capacity of the data base. Action: None ═══ 372. Message DFIPD537 - Help ═══ Message Static entry not found. Meaning: The static entry selected for deletion was not in the bridge static entry database and, therefore, could not be deleted. Action: None ═══ 373. Message DFIPD538 - Help ═══ Message Invalid locally administered address or name. Meaning: The locally administered address that you entered was not within the valid range. Action: Enter a locally administered address between XX'4000 0000 0001' and XX'4000 7FFF FFFF'. ═══ 374. Message DFIPD539 - Help ═══ Message Locally administered address has been updated. Re-link required. Meaning: LAN Network Manager has changed a locally administered address of this bridge. The address has been set in the bridge as well as updated in the Bridge Definition Table. However, the bridge must be re-linked before the new locally administered address can become effective. Action: All LAN Network Managers linked to this bridge must be re-linked. ═══ 375. Message DFIPD540 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager database in use. Meaning: A LAN Network Manager table needed for verifying the entered data is currently not accessible. Action: Wait for a little while and try the same action again. ═══ 376. Message DFIPD541 - Help ═══ Message Updating of locally administered address in LAN network manager database failed. Meaning: LAN Network Manager has changed a locally administered address of this bridge. The address has been set in the bridge, but an attempt to update the Bridge Definition Table has failed. Moreover, the bridge must be re-linked before the new locally administered address can become effective. Action: Use Change Bridge Definition to update the locally administered address in LAN Network Manager's database and re-link the bridge. ═══ 377. Message DFIPD542 - Help ═══ Message Re-link to bridge required before changing address. Meaning: You have already changed a locally administered address. Please re-link this bridge before changing the address again. Action: Un-link and re-link to the bridge, and then change the locally administered address if desired. ═══ 378. Message DFIPD543 - Help ═══ Message You have requested to change the Frame forwarding parameter from Inactive to Active. The bridge may take several minutes to change this parameter. Meaning: You requested to change the Frame forwarding status of an 8209 bridge from Inactive to Active. The 8209 bridge may take several minutes to make the change. Therefore, the change might not be reflected in the Configuration Parameters window immediately. Action: If you want to confirm the change, exit the Configuration Parameters window and the Bridge Profile window. Wait several minutes. Then, query the profile of the bridge and access the Configuration Parameters window again. If you do not want to confirm the change, no action is required. ═══ 379. Message DFIPD566 - Help ═══ Message Unable to communicate with LAN Station Manager in the target station. Meaning: You have requested information about a station that is maintained by LAN Station Manager. LAN Network Manager is unable to communicate with LAN Station Manager in the target station. Action: Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed and running on the target station. ═══ 380. Message DFIPD600 - Help ═══ Message Database not updated on LSM data query. Meaning: LAN Network Manager was able to query the station successfully, but it was unable to update the database with the current values. Action: The database table has been damaged in some way. The database may have to be recovered. ═══ 381. Message DFIPD601 - Help ═══ Message Error encoding/decoding CMIP frame. Meaning: The data from station manager cannot be obtained correctly because of an error encoding/decoding the CMIP frame. Instead, the data is obtained from data base. Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. ═══ 382. Message DFIPD602 - Help ═══ Message Set operation rejected by LSM. Meaning: LSM rejected the request to update the fields. None of the fields have been updated at the station. Action: None ═══ 383. Message DFIPD607 - Help ═══ Message LSM set error. Could not set the following: Action: Retry the operation. ═══ 384. Message DFIPD608 - Help ═══ Message Response from LSM failed. Meaning: The profile information was successfully retrieved from the adapter interface, but the request for LSM information failed. If LSM information has been logged in the database, a profile will be displayed with that information. Action: Retry the operation. Ensure that LSM is still operational on that station. ═══ 385. Message DFIPD610 - Help ═══ Message Cannot communicate with any ring utilization reporter on segment xxx. Meaning: One of the following conditions prevented LAN Network Manager from reporting the ring utilization for this segment: 1. There is no adapter on the specified segment that is capable of reporting ring utilization. To report ring utilization, a station must: o have LSM installed and running o for OS/2, have OS/2 ES 1.0 installed and running for DOS, have LAN Support Program 1.2 or later installed and running o have at least one active Token Ring adapter on the ring in question that supports ring utilization. (Adapter Part Number: 74F9410, Feature code: 0149) 2. None of the adapters in the configuration table in the database that is capable of reporting ring utilization is responding to LAN Network Manager. 3. The LAN Network Manager program is experiencing increasing soft errors. Action: If you believe there is an adapter capable of reporting ring utilization on the segment, resync the ring using the manual resync option on the Configuration List window and try again. If a newly-updated configuration list reports an adapter capable of reporting ring utilization as active, check the Event Log to see if an adapter congested alert has been reported for this adapter. If the adapter is congested it will not be able to respond to LAN Network Manager's query. ═══ 386. Message DFIPD611 - Help ═══ Message Entry fields text unchanged. Meaning: You have changed the contents of a field but the information in the field is not different. Action: Verify that you have entered the correct information. ═══ 387. Message DFIPD615 - Help ═══ Message CAU XXXXXXXX cannot be registered. The CAU already is registered with XXXXXXXXXXXX. Meaning: You have requested to register with an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) that is currently registered to another LAN management program. The adapter address of this management program is provided in the message text. You cannot register with this CAU until the other management program deregisters. Action: Contact the person who controls the LAN management program that is registered with the CAU and request that the CAU be deregistered. Wait until the CAU is deregistered and resubmit the request. ═══ 388. Message DFIPD650 - Help ═══ Message The list of adapters for segment n is not available. LAN Network Manager does not have access to adapters in Ethernet segments. Meaning: You have requested a configuration list or a segment level view for an Ethernet segment. LAN Network Manager does not communicate with adapters on Ethernet segments and, therefore, cannot provide that information. Action: None. ═══ 389. Message DFIPD651 - Help ═══ Message The test cannot be performed on segment n. LAN Network Manager does not have access to Ethernet segments. Meaning: You have requested to test an Ethernet segment for data-transfer capabilities. LAN Network Manager does not communicate with Ethernet segments and, therefore, cannot provide that information. Action: None. ═══ 390. Message DFIPD652 - Help ═══ Message The graphics facility does not exist on this system. LAN Network Manager will run in the text mode. Meaning: You have requested to run the LAN Network Manager with a graphical user interface. However, LAN Network Manager cannot find the graphic facility on this workstation and, therefore, will run with the textual interface. Action: Verify that the graphical facility is installed on your workstation and that your CONFIG.SYS has been updated to access the facility. Then, restart LAN Network Manager. The graphical facility is installed in the IBMEXQ directory. Ensure that this directory is specified in the LIBPATH statement of your CONFIG.SYS. ═══ 391. Message DFIPD653 - Help ═══ Message All the graphics DLLs could not be loaded. LAN Network Manager will run in the text mode. Meaning: This message is displayed under the following conditions: o You have requested to run the LAN Network Manager with a graphical user interface. However, LAN Network Manager cannot load the graphic facility DLLs and, therefore, will run with the textual interface. o You are attempting to start LAN Network Manager from a directory other than the LM11 directory. Action: If you are attempting to start LAN Network Manager from a command line or a command file, ensure that the current directory is LM11. Otherwise, reinstall LAN Network Manager. ═══ 392. Message DFIPD660 - Help ═══ Message Filter not found. Meaning: You have selected a filter that cannot be found. The filter might have been deleted by another user from the NetView interface. Action: Refresh the Event Filters window to verify that the filter still exists. ═══ 393. Message DFIPD661 - Help ═══ Message From date cannot be after To date. Meaning: You have specified a From date that is later than the To date that you specified. Action: Check the dates that you entered. Ensure that the From date is on or before the To date. ═══ 394. Message DFIPD662 - Help ═══ Message From time cannot be after To time. Meaning: You have specified a From time that is later than the To time that you specified. Action: Check the times that you entered. Ensure that the From time is on or before the To time. ═══ 395. Message DFIPD663 - Help ═══ Message No more than 255 segments may be specified. Meaning: You have specified more than 255 segments for an Event Log filter. Note: In the LAN Network Manager user interface, the listbox on the Add Event Filter window can contain more than 255 segments, however, you cannot specify more than 255 segments for a filter. Action: Reduce the number to 255 or less. ═══ 396. Message DFIPD664 - Help ═══ Message Filter not found. Do you want to add the filter? Meaning: You have requested to change a filter that has been deleted. Perhaps the filter was deleted by a NetView operator while you were changing it. Action: If you would like to add the filter, select Ok. Otherwise, select Cancel. ═══ 397. Message DFIPD670 - Help ═══ Message Error opening the specified file. DosOpen rc=n. Meaning: An error occurred while trying to open the specified file. The return code from the open command is indicated in the message. The meaning and action for the most common return codes are as follows: 3 Path not found. Action: Ensure that the path is correct. 4 Too many files open. Action: Close some files and resubmit the command. 5 Access denied. Action: Verify that write access is available for the file. 112 Disk full. Action: Free some disk space then resubmit the command. For information on other return codes, read the information about the DosOpen command in the OS/2 Programming Reference. ═══ 398. Message DFIPD671 - Help ═══ Message The file already exists. LAN Network Manager will append to the file. Meaning: The specified file already exists. Action: If you want LAN Network Manager to append the information to the file, select Ok. Otherwise, select Cancel then resubmit the command with a different filename specified. ═══ 399. Message DFIPD672 - Help ═══ Message Currently defined autolink values will be used. Meaning: You have selected more than one bridge to be linked. Action: Select Yes to have LAN Network Manager default to the currently defined autolink value for each bridge. Select No to have LAN Network Manager prompt you for the autolink value of each bridge. ═══ 400. Message DFIPD990 - Help ═══ Message A software error has occurred during the execution of the LAN Network Manager. The LAN Network Manager is no longer operational. Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program is experiencing a critical internal error and is no longer operational. This message is an alert but is not logged in the LAN Network Manager event log. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has communication with a host, this alert is sent to the host. The text for the error is saved in the DFIERROR.LOG file. If the disk is full, it may not be possible to record the error in the file. Each time that the LAN Network Manager program is started (this does not include starting via the Restart function), the DFIERROR.LOG file is renamed to DFIERROR.BAK and a new file is created if an error occurs. The message is displayed with the following data: 1. Component ID 2. Location 3. Error code. Action: Perform the following based on the Component ID that is displayed: 3001 There has been a critical database error. The Error code contains the code returned to the LAN Network Manager program from the Database Manager. Full descriptions of the Database Manager error codes are in Database Manager Programming Guide and Reference, Volume 2, Appendix A. By following the actions advised in that documentation, re-installation of the LAN Network Manager program may be avoidable. The following is an abbreviated list of the error codes that may be received from the Database Manager: 964 The transaction log for the database is full. The file space for the transaction log has been exhausted. Increase the available disk space. If the error recurs, then increase the database configuration parameter to allow a larger log file. 968 The file system is full. The file system containing the database is full. Increase the available disk space. 11000 The LAN Network Manager adapter interface is out of transmit buffers. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. 11001 Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. 11002 Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. 11003 Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. 12002 The LAN Network Manager program has exhausted its heap space. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. 21000 The LAN Network Manager graphical interface is unable to allocate memory. Ensure that the required amount of memory is installed on the machine. For best results, restart the workstation and then restart LAN Network Manager. If this is not possible, restart LAN Network Manager. If this message recurs, record the error data and contact your service supplier. Other Restart the LAN Network Manager program. If the problem recurs, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact your service supplier. ═══ 401. Message DFIPD1101 - Help ═══ Message Error creating window. Meaning: An error has occurred during the creation of the window. You might have too many windows or applications open. Action: Close some of the windows or applications. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 402. Message DFIPD1102 - Help ═══ Message Too many open views. Meaning: You have requested to open a view while eight views are already open. You cannot have more than 8 views open at one time. Action: Close any views that you do not need before requesting to open another view. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 403. Message DFIPD1105 - Help ═══ Message File I/O error. Meaning: An error has occurred while writing to or reading from the meta file associated with this view. Action: Do the following: 1. Verify that your disk has sufficient space on which to store the view. You should have at least 2MB of free space. 2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 3. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 404. Message DFIPD1106 - Help ═══ Message Error while laying out the view. Meaning: An error has occurred while the graphic layout facility was creating the view. Action: Do the following: 1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 2. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 405. Message DFIPD1109 - Help ═══ Message No adapters in the segment. The view cannot be opened. Meaning: You have requested to open a segment level view for a segment that has no adapters associated with it. Action: None. ═══ 406. Message DFIPD1110 - Help ═══ Message The list of adapters for segment is not available. LAN Network Manager does not have access to adapters in Ethernet segment. Meaning: You have requested to display a segment level view of a segment that is an Ethernet segment. LAN Network Manager does not have access to information about Ethernet adapters and, therefore, cannot display the segment level view. Action: None. ═══ 407. Message DFIPD1112 - Help ═══ Message Layout facility does not support so many linked or once linked bridges. Delete the definitions for some of the bridges not currently in use. Meaning: The graphic facility does not support more than 1400 nodes. Each segment to which you are linked by a bridge or to which you were once linked by a bridge constitutes a node. Action: Delete the definitions of some of the unused bridges to which you were once linked. ═══ 408. Message DFIPD1121 - Help ═══ Message Error initializing the window. Meaning: An error has occurred during the initialization of the window. You might have too many windows or applications open. Action: Close some of the windows or applications. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 409. Message DFIPD1122 - Help ═══ Message Error creating message queue. Meaning: An error has occurred during the initialization of the message queue. You might have too many windows or applications open. Action: Close some of the windows or applications. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 410. Message DFIPD1123 - Help ═══ Message Error registering window. Meaning: An error has occurred during the registration of the window. You might have too many windows or applications open. Action: Close some of the windows or applications. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. ═══ 411. Message DFIPD1130 - Help ═══ Message Error reading profile. The LAN Network Manager cannot continue and will close. Meaning: The graphic facility profile is missing or has been corrupted. Action: Recopy PROFCRNT.DAT and PROFDEF.DAT from the installation diskettes into the LM11 directory. Then, restart LAN Network Manager. If the problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager ═══ 412. Message DFIPD1131 - Help ═══ Message Unexpected window close message received. Meaning: An error occurred that has caused the window to close unexpectedly. Action: Note the reason code and consult your system programmer. ═══ 413. Message DFIPD1132 - Help ═══ Message Error loading a library file. Load Error = n. The LAN Network Manager cannot continue and will close. Meaning: An error has occurred while attempting to load a resource file. Action: Do the following: 1. Restart the workstation. 2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. 3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program. 4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation. ═══ 414. Message DFIPD1133 - Help ═══ Message Error initializing the graphic facility. Meaning: An error occurred during initialization of the graphic facility. The view cannot be displayed. Action: Do the following: 1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 2. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center. ═══ 415. Message DFIPD1135 - Help ═══ Message Error allocating memory. Meaning: A heap error occurred while LAN Network Manager was allocating memory. Action: 1. Close some of the windows. 2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center. ═══ 416. Message DFIPD1136 - Help ═══ Message Error starting the graphic facility window with view in it. Meaning: An error occurred during initialization of the graphic facility. The view cannot be displayed. Action: Do the following: 1. Close some of the windows. 2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center. ═══ 417. Message DFIPD1137 - Help ═══ Message Error saving the view. Meaning: An error occurred while the view was being saved. Action: Do the following: 1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11 directory. 2. Resubmit the save request. 3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center. ═══ 418. Message DFIPD1138 - Help ═══ Message Operation failed. Objects could not be selected on the graphic facility. Meaning: The graphic facility could not select the object. Action: Close the view. Re-open the view. Then, resubmit the request. ═══ 419. Message DFIPD1141 - Help ═══ Message Definition does not exist. Meaning: You have requested resource information and status for an undefined resource. Action: None. ═══ 420. Message DFIPD1142 - Help ═══ Message All customization will be lost. Meaning: You have requested to reset the symbols or colors to their default. All customization to the symbols or colors will be lost. Action: To proceed, select OK. To quit, select Cancel. ═══ 421. Message DFIPD1143 - Help ═══ Message The view will be saved. Any existing view file will be overwritten. Meaning: You have requested to save a view for which a VIE file already exists. The new VIE file will overwrite the existing one. Action: To proceed, select OK. To quit, select Cancel. ═══ 422. Message DFIPD1145 - Help ═══ Message Bridge n : definition has been deleted. Operation cannot be performed. Meaning: You have requested to perform an action on an invalid bridge. The bridge's definition has been deleted. If configuration refresh is set to manual, the view will not reflect the deletion of a bridge definition until the view is refreshed. Action: None. ═══ 423. Message DFIPD1146 - Help ═══ Message Segment type is 3174-Peer or PC Network. No other information is available. Meaning: You have requested information about the symbol representing a BUS in a 3174-Peer or PC Network segment. The only information available about this symbol is the LAN type. Action: None. ═══ 424. Message DFIPD1150 - Help ═══ Message Legend is already invoked. Meaning: You have requested to access the Legend from a view while the Legend window is already open from another view. Action: Locate the Legend window that is open. ═══ 425. Message DFIPD1151 - Help ═══ Message Unable to draw the icon. Meaning: An error occurred while an icon was being drawn in the Legend - symbols window. Action: Shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. If the problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager. ═══ 426. Message DFIPD1152 - Help ═══ Message Unable to create the color table. Meaning: An error occurred while the colors were being drawn in the Legend - colors window. Action: Shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. If the problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager. ═══ 427. Message DFIPD1154 - Help ═══ Message Item selected cannot be modified. Meaning: You have requested to change a symbol on the Legend - symbols window that is fixed and cannot be changed. The following symbols cannot be changed: o Disabled-used CAU lobe o Disabled-unused CAU lobe o Remote bridge o Bridge Action: None. ═══ 428. Message DFIPD1155 - Help ═══ Message The customization on all colors and symbols will be lost. Meaning: You have requested to reset the symbols and colors to their defaults. All customization to the symbols and colors will be lost. Action: To proceed, select OK. To quit, select Cancel. ═══ 429. Message DFIPD1161 - Help ═══ Message Too many tackpoints in view. Meaning: More than 300 tackpoints have been defined in a single view. Action: Either delete some of the tackpoints or delete the VIE file that represents this view. ═══ 430. Message DFIPD1162 - Help ═══ Message Too many tackpoints between two nodes. Meaning: More than 50 tackpoints have been defined between two nodes in a view. Action: Either delete some of the tackpoints or delete the VIE file that represents this view. ═══ 431. Message DFIPD1172 - Help ═══ Message Segment n not found. Meaning: The segment that you specified on the Find window does not exist. Action: Verify the segment number and resubmit the request. ═══ 432. Message DFIPD1174 - Help ═══ Message Bridge n not found. Meaning: The bridge that you specified on the Find window does not exist. Action: Verify the bridge name and resubmit the request. ═══ 433. Message DFIPD1178 - Help ═══ Message Invalid segment number n. CAU n found in Segment n. Meaning: You have specified both a segment number and a CAU ID on the Find window. This CAU ID cannot be found on the specified segment. Action: Verify the segment number and the CAU ID. Then, resubmit the request. ═══ 434. Message DFIPD1180 - Help ═══ Message CAU n not found. Meaning: The CAU that you specified on the Find window does not exist. Action: Verify the CAU ID and resubmit the request. ═══ 435. Message DFIPD1184 - Help ═══ Message Adapter n not found in Segment n. Meaning: You have specified both a segment number and an adapter address or name on the Find window. This adapter cannot be found on the specified segment. Action: Verify the segment number and the adapter name or address. Then, resubmit the request. ═══ 436. Message DFIPD1189 - Help ═══ Message Adapter n not found. Meaning: The adapter name or address that you specified on the Find window does not exist. Action: Verify the adapter name or address and resubmit the request. ═══ 437. Message DFIPD1196 - Help ═══ Message Adapter n attached to CAU, but CAU ID not found. Meaning: The adapter that you requested to find has been found and is attached to a CAU. However, the CAU ID for that CAU is not in the database. Action: Resynchronize the segment in which the adapter was found. Turn the CAU off then on. Then, resubmit the request. ═══ 438. Message DFIPD1197 - Help ═══ Message The find operation could not be completed due to a database error. Meaning: Your request could not be completed due to a database error. This error will also be accompanied by a error message from Database Manager. Action: Refer to the Actions for the associated Database Manager error message. ═══ 439. Message DFIPD1301 - Help ═══ Message The selected event(s) will be deleted from the event log. Meaning: The selected events will be deleted from the event log. The records of the selected events will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 440. Message DFIPD1302 - Help ═══ Message The event log will be cleared. Meaning: All records in the event log will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 441. Message DFIPD1303 - Help ═══ Message The event will be deleted from the event log. Meaning: The record of the event will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 442. Message DFIPD1304 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager will be restarted with all system parameter updates applied. Do you want to continue with restart? Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter will momentarily close and re-open. In addition, the following will happen: o All bridges will be unlinked and will not be relinked unless automatic bridge link is specified in their definition and autolink on the Bridge Parameters window is set to active. o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter used, or maximum events in the event log) will be applied. o LAN Network Manager's segment will be resynched. Note: The adapter close is a logical close which will not effect the adapter communications of any other applications. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 443. Message DFIPD1305 - Help ═══ Message LAN Network Manager will be terminated and all network management operations will end. Do you want to exit LAN Network Manager? Meaning: LAN Network Manager will be terminated and all network management operations will end. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 444. Message DFIPD1306 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deletion of CAU(s). Meaning: The definitions of the selected CAUs will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 445. Message DFIPD1307 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deletion of bridge(s). Meaning: The definitions of the selected bridges will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 446. Message DFIPD1308 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deletion of station(s). Meaning: The definitions of the selected stations will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 447. Message DFIPD1309 - Help ═══ Message The LAN Network Manager will be secured from unauthorized access. The LAN Network Manager's adapter will not be closed. Logging and alert functions will continue. Meaning: LAN Network Manager will be iconized. If anyone selects any of the functions on the icon's menu or attempts to restore the icon to LAN Network Manager's main window, LAN Network Manager will prompt them to enter a user ID and password defined in OS/2's User Profile Management. If the user enters an incorrect user ID or password, LAN Network Manager will remain in a secured state. While secured, LAN Network Manager will operate normally. Event and alert logging functions will continue, as will other functions such as access control and detection of configuration changes. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 448. Message DFIPD1310 - Help ═══ Message Confirm removal of this adapter from the network. Meaning: Once removed, the adapter will no longer be able to communicate with the network in any way. Manual intervention at the workstation will probably be required to restore the adapter's ability to communicate with the network. Note that the removal of an adapter may adversely effect the operation of a ring. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 449. Message DFIPD1311 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deletion of filter(s). Meaning: The definitions of the selected filters will be deleted from the database. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 450. Message DFIPD1312 - Help ═══ Message Deactivate previously defined filter? Meaning: Alerts will no longer be passed through the filter in question before being sent to the host. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 451. Message DFIPD1313 - Help ═══ Message Failed to start filter program. Meaning: The user filter could not be started for one of the following reasons: o LAN Network Manager froze a previous user filter because it timed out, that is it took longer than 5 seconds to return control to the LAN Network Manager program. No more user filters can be started for this invocation of the LAN Network Manager program. o LAN Network Manager could not create a thread to execute the filter program you defined. Action: If a previous filter has timed out, you must exit LAN Network Manager and start it again to be able to define a new user filter. If a previous filter has not timed out, either end some other OS/2 applications and retry the operation or increase the THREADS parameter in your CONFIG.SYS and reboot the workstation. Note that this parameter cannot be greater than 255. ═══ 452. Message DFIPD1314 - Help ═══ Message Help initialization failed. Help will not be available for this invocation of LAN Network Manager. Meaning: An error has occurred while LAN Network Manager was initializing Help. LAN Network Manager will continue to run, but no help will be available. Action: To proceed without Help, select Ok. Otherwise, select Cancel, exit LAN Network Manager, then start LAN Network Manager again. ═══ 453. Message DFIPD1315 - Help ═══ Message Confirm swap of x and y. Meaning: You have requested to swap the positions of two of the Controlled Access Unit lobe access modules. Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 454. Message DFIPD1316 - Help ═══ Message Shutdown request ignored. LAN Network Manager cannot be shut down when the main window's action bar is grayed. Meaning: You started a Desktop Shutdown while LAN Network Manager was busy performing one of the following operations: o Initialization o Restart o Deletion of the Event Log o Exit Action: Wait until LAN Network Manager finishes the operation. You may then select Shutdown from the Desktop Manager pull-down menu again. ═══ 455. Message DFIPD1317 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deregistration of CAU(s). Meaning: You have requested to deregister with one or more IBM 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs). The CAU status remains Normal and Registered displays the value of No on the Controlled Access Units window. In addition, you will be unable to monitor the stations attached to the CAU. Action: To proceed, select OK. No response message is sent. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ 456. Message DFIPD1318 - Help ═══ Message Confirm deletion of qualifier(s). Meaning: You have requested to delete segments from the CAU Qualifiers list. CAU Qualifiers are segments to which LAN Network Manager has a bridged path but no link. The LAN Network Manager program deregisters with any CAUs on these segments when you delete them from the CAU Qualifiers list. Once you delete these segment definitions, they will not be displayed on the CAU Qualifier window, and LAN Network Manager will not search for CAUs to monitor this segment. All managment of and communication by LAN Network Manager to CAUs on this segment stops. Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel. ═══ File ═══ Select File from a view to use one of the following functions: Save To save the view. Save as To save a copy of the view with a new name or description. Print To print or plot a copy of the view. ═══ Save ═══ Select Save, in the File pull-down menu, to save the view without changing the current view name or description. If there is a file with the same name, the file you create here will overwrite the existing one. ═══ Save as ═══ Select Save as, in the File pull-down menu, to save a copy of the view with a different name and description. When you select Save as, a window displays the current view name and description. Make your changes in that window. ═══ Save As ═══ Select Save as, in the File pull-down menu, to save a copy of the view. Use this window to change the view name or description. Then select the Save pushbutton. To exit Save as without making any changes, select Cancel. ═══ View Name ═══ You can enter a new name, up to 256 characters, for the view. ═══ View Description ═══ You can enter a description, up to 256 characters, of the view. ═══ Print ═══ Select Print, in the File pull-down menu, to print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view. When you select Print, a window appears in which you can specify print options and the print destination. While you are printing, the Print pull-down item changes to Stop printing. You can stop the print by selecting Stop printing in the pull-down menu. If you move the view, change the size of the view, or change an object in the view, the view window will not show the changes until the print is completed. To print all or part of the online help, do the following: 1. Request help in order to display a help window. 2. Select Services on the action bar of the help window. 3. Select Print in the Services pull-down menu. 4. Specify the portions of the online help that you want to print. ═══ Print Options ═══ In this window, specify whether you want the nodes filled when you print the view. The pattern or color with which a node is filled can indicate its status or its type. If you do not need this information, you can save printing time by not selecting the Fill Nodes check box. After you decide whether you want the nodes filled, select a print destination from the displayed list, then select Print. Select Printer Setup to specify more print options, such as the type of form to use, the print quality, and form-feed control. To exit Print options without making any changes, select Cancel. ═══ Fill Nodes ═══ Select the Fill Nodes check box on the Print Options window if you want the inside area of the node symbol filled in with color or a pattern when the view is printed. The pattern or color with which a node is filled can indicate its status or its type. If you do not need this type of information, you can save printing time by not selecting the Fill Nodes check box. ═══ Destinations ═══ In this window, select one of the listed destinations to indicate where you want the print output sent. Each destination is a printer or plotter that is defined to the OS/2 * program. The format of each destination is: on using <(device name)> ═══ Printer Setup ═══ In this window, set up the printer options, such as paper size, orientation, and other options supported by the printer. This window is provided by the specific device driver installed in the system. ═══ Edit ═══ Select Edit from a view to use the following functions: Undo To cancel the last edit change you or the application program made to the view. Undo last x changes To cancel the last x editing changes you made to a view since you opened or saved the view. Find To locate a node or link in a view. If you do not know the resource name, you can enter search criteria to try to find it. Select object types To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text, or tackpoints) in the current view. Deselect all To deselect anything that you selected in a view, including objects or a region. Select objects in region To select the objects in the region of a certain type inside a selection box. Cut To cut (move) objects from the selected region into a clipboard. You can later paste these objects into a region in the current view or in another view. Copy To copy objects from the selected region into a clipboard. You can later paste these objects into a region in another view or in the current view. Paste To paste copied or cut objects from the clipboard into the selected region. Add background picture To add a background picture to a view. Delete background picture To remove a background picture from a view. Move To move a selected object (node, text, or tackpoints) or selected region of objects into another location in the view. Clear To remove selected objects from the view. Add objects To add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links to a view. With Add objects, you can add any object that the application program provides. Stop adding objects To exit Add objects. Modify text To change text that you have added to a view. ═══ Undo ═══ Select Undo, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the most recent editing change you or the application program made to the view. Undo displays the most recent editing function. For example, if Move was your last editing change, the item on the Edit pull-down menu is Undo move. You can continue to use Undo to step backwards through the editing changes you made to the view and cancel each change. Undo cancels only editing changes. You cannot select Undo until you make an editing change to the view. Undo does not cancel editing changes after you save a view. ═══ Undo last x changes ═══ Select Undo last x changes, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the last x editing changes that you have made to the view since you opened it or since you saved the view, whichever is the most recent. If you zoom in on the view and select Undo last x changes, you cancel all the editing changes to the entire view, whether or not they are visible in the new window. You cannot select Undo last x changes until you have made at least one editing change to the view. When you select Undo last x changes, message EXQ0408W appears and asks you to confirm your decision. ═══ Find ═══ Select Find, in the Edit pull-down menu, to locate a node or a link in a view. When you select Find, a window appears in which you can enter up to four search arguments. Enter the full or partial name, address, type, or any other data that might locate the resource. You can use wildcards, such as (asterisks and question marks) if you do not know the full name. Leaving a field blank is equivalent to entering an asterisk in the field. When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the resource, and that resource is selected. ═══ Find a Resource ═══ Type in a full or partial resource name, resource address, resource type, or any other location data, then select either the Find First or Find All pushbutton. Select Find First to find a resource that meets the search requirements. After that resource is found, the Find First pushbutton changes to Find Next. If you select that pushbutton, you then find another resource that meets the search arguments. Select Find All to find all resources in the view that meet search arguments. Select Case Sensitive to recognize the difference between upper and lowercase characters. When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the resource, and that resource is selected. To exit Find, select Cancel. ═══ Case Sensitive ═══ Select Case Sensitive to recognize the difference between upper and lowercase characters. ═══ Name ═══ Enter the full or partial name of the resource you are trying to find. ═══ Address ═══ Enter the full or partial address of the resource you are trying to find. ═══ Type ═══ Enter the full or partial type of the resource you are trying to find. ═══ Other data ═══ Enter any other information that might locate the resource. ═══ Select object types ═══ Choose Select object types, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more types of objects in the view. You can select Node groups, Link groups, Free text, and Tackpoints. Many actions on the action bar become available to you only after you select an object. These actions are grayed out until you select an object or a region. Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then deselect the objects you do not want. ═══ Select Object Types ═══ Choose Select object types, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more types of objects in the view. In this window, select one or more of the following types of objects from the view: Node groups Link groups Free text Tackpoints Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then deselect the objects you do not want. ═══ Node groups ═══ Select Node groups in the Select Object Types window, to select all the nodes in the view. When you select node groups, you automatically select any text that the application program provides for them. ═══ Link groups ═══ Select Link groups on the Select Object Types window, to select all the links in the view. When you select link groups, you automatically select any text that the application program provides for them. ═══ Free text ═══ Select Free text on the Select Object Types window, to select all the text in the view. This selects the text that you have added to the view, not the text that the application program provides for resources. ═══ Tackpoints ═══ Select Tackpoints on the Select Object Types window, to select all the tackpoints in the view. ═══ Deselect all ═══ Select Deselect all, in the Edit pull-down menu, to deselect everything that you selected in the view, including objects and regions. Deselect all is not available unless you have selected one or more objects or a region. ═══ Select objects in region ═══ Choose Select objects in region, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more types of the objects in a defined region. To select objects in a region, you first select a region in the view. You can choose the following types of objects in the region you selected: Node groups Link groups Free text Tackpoints Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region, then deselect the individual objects that you do not want. ═══ Select Objects in Region ═══ Choose Select objects in region, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more types of the objects in a defined region. In this window, choose one or more types of objects to select from the selected region. To select objects in a region, you first select a region in the view. You can choose the following types of objects from the specified region: Node groups Link groups Free text Tackpoints Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region, then deselect the individual objects that you do not want. ═══ Node groups ═══ Select Node groups on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the nodes in the specified region. When you select node groups, you automatically select any text that the application program provides for them. ═══ Link groups ═══ Select Link groups on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the links in the specified region. When you select link groups, you automatically select any text that the application program provides for them. ═══ Free text ═══ Select Free text on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the text that you have added within the specified region. This selects the text that you added to the view, not the text that the application program provides for resources. ═══ Tackpoints ═══ Select Tackpoints on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the tackpoints in the selected region. ═══ Cut ═══ Select Cut, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move objects from a selected region to the clipboard. To select Cut, you first select a region from which to cut an object or objects. To cut objects from one region in a view and paste them onto another region in the same view, you would do the following: 1. Select the region from which you want to cut objects. 2. Select Cut. A window then appears, in which you select the types of objects you want to cut. Select the types of objects you want to cut. You can cut the following types of objects from the region: Node groups Link groups Free Text 3. Select the Cut pushbutton. 4. Select Paste. You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts the objects within the box. If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box. Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 within the region to paste the objects. If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them. To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2. ═══ Cut ═══ Select Cut, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move objects from a selected region to the clipboard. In this window, select one or more types of objects to cut from the selected region, then select Cut. You can cut the following types of objects from the region you selected: Node groups Link groups Free Text When you cut links, you also cut their corresponding nodes. To exit Cut, select Cancel. ═══ Nodes ═══ Select Node groups on the Cut window, to cut all of the nodes in the selected region. When you cut nodes, you automatically cut all objects grouped with those nodes, including text. ═══ Links ═══ Select Link groups on the Cut window, to cut all of the links in the selected region. The links check box is disabled (grayed-out) until you select Node groups. When you cut links you cut their attached nodes. When you cut links, you automatically cut all objects grouped with those links, such as text and tackpoints. ═══ Text ═══ Select Free text on the Cut window, to cut all of the text that you have added in the selected region. This function does not cut text grouped with other objects. ═══ Copy ═══ Select Copy, in the Edit pull-down menu, to copy objects from a selected region into the clipboard. To select Copy, you must first select a region from which to copy objects. To copy objects from one region in a view onto another region in the same view, you would do the following: 1. Select the region from which you want to copy objects. 2. Select Copy. A window then appears, in which you select the types of objects you want to copy. Select the types of objects you want to copy. You can copy the following types of objects from the region: Node groups Link groups (with or without Tackpoints) Free text 3. Select the Copy pushbutton. 4. Select Paste. You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts the objects within the box. If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box. Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 to paste the objects. If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them. To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2. ═══ Copy ═══ Select Copy, in the Edit pull-down menu, to copy objects from a selected region into the clipboard. In this window, select one or more types of objects to copy from the selected region, then select Copy. You can copy the following types of objects from the region you selected: Node groups Link groups Free text When you copy links, you also copy their corresponding nodes. To exit Copy without copying any objects, select Cancel. ═══ Nodes ═══ Select Node groups on the Copy window, to copy all of the nodes in the selected region. When you copy nodes, you automatically copy all objects grouped with nodes, including text. ═══ Links ═══ Select Link groups on the Copy window, to copy all of the links in the selected region. When you copy links you also copy their attached nodes. If you do not select nodes, the links check box remains disabled. If you are copying a region, the link's endpoint nodes must be included in the region for the links and nodes to be copied. When you copy links, you automatically copy all objects grouped with links, such as text and tackpoints. ═══ Text ═══ Select Free text on the Copy window, to copy all of the text in the selected region. When you copy text, you automatically copy all objects grouped with text, such as nodes and links. ═══ Paste ═══ Select Paste, in the Edit pull-down menu, to place objects that have been copied or cut into the clipboard onto the selected region which may be positioned. To paste objects from view ABC onto view XYZ, you would do the following: 1. Select the region in view ABC from which you want to copy or cut objects to be pasted. 2. Select Copy or Cut from view ABC. A window lets you select the types of objects you want to copy or cut. 3. Select the types of objects you want to copy or cut. 4. Select the Copy or Cut pushbutton. 5. Select Paste in view XYZ. You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts the objects within the box. If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box. Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 within the region to paste the objects. If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them. Paste remains available with the same objects until you select other objects to copy or cut. To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2. ═══ Add background picture ═══ Select Add background picture, in the Edit pull-down menu, to add a background picture to a view. A window will allow you to select the background picture you want to add to the view. Any valid OS/2 * metafile can be added as a background picture. You can create a selection box in which to add the background picture. If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box. The picture is placed inside the selection box and behind all view information. You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view, or with Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. You can add only one background picture to a view. To use a different background picture, you first remove the current picture. The following is an example of a background picture: ═══ Add Background Picture mode ═══ Enter search criteria in the Background Picture field or use the default to receive a list of possible background pictures. Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or double-click on the background picture filename. To exit Add background picture without adding a picture to the view, select Cancel or Stop adding objects. You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view, or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. You can add only one background picture to a view. ═══ Add Background Picture ═══ Enter search criteria in the Background Picture field or use the default to receive a list of possible background pictures. Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or double-click on the background picture filename. To exit Add background picture without adding a picture to the view, select Cancel or Stop adding objects. You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view, or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. You can add only one background picture to a view. ═══ Background Picture ═══ Type in the file name of the background picture or enter search criteria, in this field on the Add Background Picture window. ═══ Type of File ═══ This field on the Add Background Picture window, lists the types of file that the system will search for. ═══ Current Drive ═══ This is the current drive in which the file system will search for the file name or search criteria that you specify in the file name field on the Add Background Picture window. Click mouse button 1 to select a drive or double-click to open the drive. ═══ File List ═══ This is a list of files that satisfies the search criteria in the file name field on the Add Background Picture window. Click mouse button 1 to select a file from the list. ═══ Directory List ═══ This is a list of all sub-directories in the current directory on the current disk. To change the current directory on the Add Background Picture window, double-click on the directory that you want to access. ═══ Delete background picture ═══ Select Delete background picture, in the Edit pull-down menu, to remove a background picture that you have added to a view. You can also remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture. Delete background picture is available only when a view has a background picture. ═══ Move ═══ Select Move, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move a selected object (text, tackpoints, or nodes) or a selected region of objects to a different location in a view. To select Move, first select an object or a region. You can move links, nodes, text, tackpoints, individually or all at once in a selected region. The two methods for moving objects or regions are: o Using Move. o Dragging the object or region with mouse button 2. Moving an Object By Selecting Move To move an object by selecting Move from the pull-down menu: 1. Select the object or region that you want to move. 2. Select Move from the Edit pull-down menu. A box appears around the selected object or region, with a move pointer inside it. 3. Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the object or region of objects. The box moves with the mouse pointer. To move the mouse pointer and selection box, use either the mouse or the mouse pointer movement keys on the keyboard. 4. When you have the box at the new location, either click mouse button 2 or press the space bar. Moving an Object by Dragging It To move an object by dragging it: 1. Position the mouse pointer on the object or region you want to move. Press and hold down mouse button 2. A box appears around the object or region, with a move pointer inside it. 2. While holding down the button, drag the box to the new location. 3. Release the mouse button. ═══ Clear ═══ Select Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu, to remove selected objects from a view. To select Clear, you first select an object or a region to clear. You can clear links, nodes, text, and tackpoints individually, or you can clear all the objects in a selected region. When you clear a node from the view, you also remove the links that connect the node to other nodes and the text that is grouped with the node or link. If you accidentally clear one or more objects from a view, you can retrieve them in one of the following ways: o Select Undo Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the deletions, one by one, beginning with the most recent. o Select Undo last x changes, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel all editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the view. o Select Close from the system menu and do not save the editing. This cancels all the editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the view. ═══ Add objects ═══ Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, to add an object to a view. To add objects to a view: 1. Press either mouse button 1 or the space bar to select a type of object in the Add objects pull-down menu. You can add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links. 2. Use mouse button 1 or the space bar to select the location in the view in which to place the object. 3. Press the Esc key, double-click mouse button 2, or select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu to exit Add objects. ═══ Add Objects ═══ Select Add objects to add objects to the view. To add an object to a view: 1. Press either mouse button 1 or the space bar to select a type of object in the Add objects pull-down menu. You can add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links. 2. Use mouse button 1 or the space bar to select the location in the view in which to place the object. 3. Press the Esc key, double-click mouse button 2, or select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu to exit Add objects. ═══ Add text ═══ Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add text in the Add objects pull-down menu, to add text to a view. This function enables you to add information, such as phone numbers or customers' names, for your own reference. When you select Add text, the pointer changes into an I-beam pointer: To identify where you want to add the new text, move the I-beam pointer to the location and click mouse button 1 or press the space bar. A window appears in which you can add up to 511 characters of text. The text is added where you positioned the I-beam pointer. You remain in Add text until you do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. You can remove text by using Undo, if you have not saved the changes, or Clear. ═══ Add Text ═══ Enter the text that you want to add to the view, then select the Add pushbutton. 1. Enter as much text as fits in the Text field, then select Add. If the text you want to add is too long to fit in the Text field, you can add more text by doing the following: 2. Move the I-beam pointer to the end of the text or to a position below it. Then click mouse button 1 or press Enter. The Add Text window appears again. 3. Enter additional text in the Text field. 4. The text may be up to 511 characters. To remove the Add Text window, select Cancel. To exit Add text entirely, first select Cancel to remove the window, then do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. ═══ Text ═══ You can enter up to 511 characters of text on the Add Text window. ═══ Add tackpoints ═══ Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add tackpoints, in the Add Objects pull-down menu to add tackpoints to a view. You can use tackpoints to bend the links in your views. When you select Add tackpoints, the mouse pointer changes to an illegal pointer until you move the pointer over a link. Then the pointer changes into a tackpoint pointer: Adding a Tackpoint 1. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position on the link where you want the tackpoint, click mouse button 1, and drag the mouse to position the tackpoint. The link bends as you move the tackpoint. When the tackpoint is in the correct position, release the mouse button to set the tackpoint in place. 2. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view. The following is an example of a view with two links, each containing a single tackpoint. The tackpoints are represented by small, white squares. Tackpoints are not normally visible unless the links they are contained in are selected. You remain in Add tackpoints until you do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. (You can also use the keyboard to add tackpoints.) You can move, delete, and hide tackpoints. To select a tackpoint, first select the link it is in. Deselect the link and the tackpoint is ready to be worked with. To move a tackpoint, select it, click and hold mouse button 2, and drag the mouse until you have positioned it in the link. To delete a tackpoint, do one of the following: o Select the tackpoints individually or all at once and delete them one at a time by selecting Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu. o Select Undo add, in the Edit pull-down menu to delete the tackpoints you added, one at a time, beginning with the most recent. ═══ Add nodes ═══ Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add nodes to add nodes to a view. To add a node: 1. Select the node type from the pull-down menu for Add objects. 2. Click mouse button 1 or press the space bar to add the node to the view. 3. Repeat step 2 until you finish adding this type of node. To cancel Add nodes do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. You can move, delete, and hide nodes. o Select the nodes and delete them one at a time by selecting Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu. o If you have just added the nodes, select Undo add, in the Edit pull-down menu to delete the nodes you added, one at a time beginning with the most recent. ═══ Add links ═══ Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add links to add links to a view. To add a link: 1. Select the link type from the pull-down menu for Add objects. 2. Click mouse button 1 or press the space bar to enter the first endpoint. To enter any link endpoints, you must be positioned over a node. After you enter the first endpoint, you can add tackpoints. 3. To enter the second endpoint, you must position the mouse pointer over a node. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you finish adding this type of link. To cancel Add links, do one of the following: o Press the Esc key. o Double-click on mouse button 2. o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. You can delete and hide links. o If you have just added the links, select Undo add in the Edit pull-down menu to delete the nodes you added, one at a time beginning with the most recent. o Select the nodes and delete them one at a time by selecting Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu. ═══ Stop adding objects ═══ Select Stop adding objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, to exit Add objects. ═══ Modify text ═══ Select Modify text, in the Edit pull-down menu, to revise existing text. To modify text, you first select the text you want to modify. When you select Modify text, a window that contains the existing text appears. You can make your changes in this window, totalling up to 511 characters. ═══ Modify Text ═══ You can make changes to the existing text. Select Modify text, in the Edit pull-down menu, to change the text on the view. To exit Modify text without making any changes, select Cancel. ═══ Text ═══ You can change the text on the Modify Text window. You can type in a total of 511 characters. ═══ View ═══ Select View to use the following functions: Zoom in To magnify a specific area in a view. Zoom out To widen your perspective of a view. Undo zoom To return the view to its configuration prior to the last Zoom in. Zoom fit To zoom in or zoom out to show all displayable objects contained in the view. Display labels To indicate the resource labels (such as names and icons) to display at a specific zoom level. Subnet To display all the resources that are attached up to nine links away from a specific node. Hide To temporarily hide a selected object or region in a view. Show only To temporarily hide everything in a view except a selected object or region. Show all To redisplay all objects hidden by Hide, Show only, or Subnet. ═══ Zoom in ═══ Select Zoom in, located in the View pull-down menu, to magnify a selected region in the view. This is what a view looks like after you have zoomed-in on it. To select Zoom in you first select a region to zoom-in on. You can store different zoom levels for each view. When you close a view, you remove all these stored zooms. Subnet and Find automatically perform zooms. These zooms are stored along with zooms that you create using the Zoom in and Zoom out functions. When you zoom in on a region, resource labels that were not displayed to you at the higher level might appear. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, in the View pull-down menu. ═══ Zoom out ═══ Select Zoom out, in the View pull-down menu, to widen your perspective of a view. Zoom out quadruples the display area of the view. This is what a view looks like after you have zoomed-out on it. The white box shows where the information in the original zoom is located in the new zoom. You can store up to 50 zoom levels for each view. When you close a view, you remove all these stored zooms. When you zoom-out on a view, resource labels that appeared at the lower level might not display. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, in the View pull-down menu. ═══ Undo zoom ═══ Select Undo zoom, in the View pull-down menu, to return the view to its configuration prior to the last zoom. ═══ Zoom fit ═══ Select Zoom fit, in the View pull-down menu, to zoom in or zoom out to show all displayable objects contained in the view. ═══ Display labels ═══ Select Display labels, in the View pull-down menu, to specify the labels to display at a specific zoom level. When you select Display labels, a window appears in which you can select the labels you want to display at the current zoom level. If you select a type of label, you display it at the current zoom level and all levels below this one. If you deselect a type of label, you hide it for all zoom levels. This is what a view looks like after you have selected to display certain labels. For example, if you are displaying a view of a large communication network, displaying labels might clutter the screen and make it hard to read. However, when you zoom in on a particular area, you might want to see the icons that indicate the resource type. You can do the following: 1. Zoom-in on the area. 2. Select Display labels. 3. A window appears, in which you select the types of labels to show. Select Icon. The icons are displayed when you view the area at that zoom level. Save the view before you close it. Then the labels will automatically appear every time you zoom in to that level and all levels below. When you reduce the size of the window, the zoom level is decreased. Therefore, you might not see the labels you requested to display at this zoom level when you reduce the window. ═══ Display Labels ═══ Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide at this zoom level. Selecting an item will show it; deselecting it will hide it. After you make your selections, select the Display pushbutton. To exit Display labels without making any changes, select Cancel. For example, if you are displaying a view of a large communication network, displaying labels might clutter the screen and make it hard to read. However, when you zoom in on a particular area, you might want to see the icons that indicate the resource type. You can do the following: 1. Zoom-in on the area. 2. Select Display labels. 3. A window appears in which you select the types of labels you want to show. Select Icon. The icons are displayed when you view the area at that zoom level. Save the view before you close it. Then, the labels will automatically appear every time you zoom in to that level and all levels above this one. ═══ Subnet ═══ Select Subnet, in the View pull-down menu, to display all resources that are located a specific number of links (or hop count) from the selected node. To select Subnet, you first select a node. Subnet lets you display a subset of your network by zooming in on resources that are part of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want to display a subset of your network if there is only a particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate. After you select Subnet, a window appears, in which you can specify the hop count. For example, if you request a subnet of Resource A with a hop count of 2, you would see every resource attached up to two links away from Resource A, but no other resources. Following is an example of a subnet with a hop count of 2. When you redisplay resources, you will see any changes that indicate status updates. The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the resources hidden by Subnet, select Show all. You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them. ═══ Subnet ═══ Subnet allows you to display all resources that are located a specific number of links (hop count) from the selected node. This function lets you view a subset of your network. You might want to display a subset of your network if there is only a particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate. Set a hop count number of up to 9, then select the Subnet pushbutton. For example, if you want to see a subnet of Resource A, with a hop count of 2, select 2 for the Hop Count field. You will then see every resource attached up to two links away from Resource A, but no further. When you redisplay these resources, you will see any changes that indicates status updates. The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the view as it was before Subnet, select Show all, in the View pull-down menu. To exit Subnet, select Cancel. You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them. Following is an example of a resource that has been subnetted with a hop count of 2. ═══ Hop Count ═══ Select the hop count to specify the number of node-to-node links to display for the selected node. The hop count can be any number from 1 to 9. For example, to see all resources up to 5 links away from Resource A, select 5 in the Hop Count field on the Subnet window. ═══ 457. Hide ═══ Select Hide, in the View pull-down menu, to temporarily conceal selected objects or a region in the view. To select Hide, you first select an object or region to hide. The following are examples of a view before and after objects have been hidden. If you hide a node, its attached links will remain visible. To hide links, select them or select the region in which they are located. The selected objects or region remain hidden until you close the view. To redisplay the view as it was before Hide, select Show all, located in the View pull-down menu. You cannot select hidden objects until you redisplay them. ═══ Show only ═══ Select Show only, in the View pull-down menu, to temporarily remove everything in the view except the objects or region you select. To select Show only, you first select an object or region. The following are examples of a view before and after selecting Show only for certain objects. If you select a node for Show only, its attached links are hidden. To display links, you must select them also. The unselected objects remain hidden until you show all the objects, using Show all. You cannot select hidden objects until you redisplay them. ═══ Show all ═══ Select Show all, in the View pull-down menu, to redisplay all objects that you hid from the view by using Hide, Show only, or Subnet. Show all will not redisplay objects that you delete from the view with Clear. Objects that you delete from the view are permanently removed when you save the edit. Show all does not affect resource labels or tackpoints. ═══ Options ═══ Select Options to use the following functions: Ignore To stop receiving status updates for selected resources. Monitor To begin receiving status updates for selected resources. Legend To display a description of the nodes, links, and status of the view. ═══ Ignore ═══ Select Ignore, in the Options pull-down menu, to stop receiving status updates for selected resources or for all the resources in a selected region. To select Ignore, you first select a resource or a region. To begin receiving status updates for an ignored resource or region, select Monitor, in the Options pull-down menu. When you begin to monitor these resources again, any changes in their colors or patterns indicate status updates. This is an example of a view with some resources ignored. The ignored resources are blue. ═══ Monitor ═══ Select Monitor, in the Options pull-down menu, to begin receiving status updates for selected resources or a region that is currently ignored. To select Monitor, you first select a resource or a region. To stop receiving status updates for a monitored resource or region, select Ignore, in the Options pull-down menu. ═══ Legend ═══ Select Legend, in the Options pull-down menu, to see a description of the nodes, links, and status in views. ═══ Legend Window ═══ The legend window defines all the nodes, links, and status in views. Use the scroll bar to move through the listing. You can move and change the size of the legend window, like you can any other window, but you cannot move it outside the view window. To close the legend, select Close from the pull-down menu for the system icon in the title bar of the legend. ═══ Switch to graphics area ═══ If you use the keyboard rather than the mouse, select Switch to graphics area, in the pull-down menu for the system icon, to switch to the graphics area, so that you can move the mouse pointer with the keyboard. To use the keyboard to move the pointer, you first select Keyboard moves pointer, in the pull-down menu for the system icon in the title bar of a view. ═══ Keyboard moves mouse pointer ═══ Select Keyboard moves pointer, in the pull-down menu for the system icon in the title bar of a view, to move the mouse pointer with the keyboard. This option remains in effect until you turn it off. To turn this option off, click mouse button 1 to reselect it. Because the mouse pointer movement keys usually move the scroll bars in the view, if you select this option and want to use the arrow keys to move the scroll bar, press the Scroll Lock key. If you want to use the keyboard for mouse pointer movement for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key and click mouse button 1 to reselect the option. ═══ 458. Hide frame controls ═══ Select Hide frame controls, in the pull-down menu for the system icon, in the title bar of a view, to hide all frame controls for this window. Frame controls are: o The action bar o The minimize and maximize arrows at the right corner of the title bar of the window o The title bar o The scroll bars. Hide frame controls remains in effect until you close the view. If you want these controls hidden for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key and reselect the option. ═══ 459. Hide scroll bars ═══ Select Hide scroll bars, in the pull-down menu for the system icon, in the title bar of a view, to hide all scroll bars for this window. Hide scroll bars remains in effect for all future occurrences of this view until you turn it off. To turn this option off, reselect it. If you want scroll bars hidden for every view you display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key and reselect the option. ═══ View, definition ═══ A view is a picture that can include nodes, links, text, tackpoints, and a background picture. This is an example of a view. ═══ Double-Click, definition ═══ Double-click means to press and release the mouse button twice, quickly, without moving the mouse. ═══ Using the keyboard to move the mouse pointer ═══ To use the keyboard to move the mouse pointer, do the following: 1. Select Keyboard moves mouse pointer, from the pull-down menu for the system icon. 2. Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer. The following is a list of the mouse pointer movements and the keys used to make those movements: Movement Key Up Up arrow Down Down arrow Right Right arrow Left Left arrow To move the mouse pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any of the keys above. If Scroll Lock is on, the arrow keys scroll the window instead of moving the mouse pointer. ═══ Using the keyboard to create and change a selection box ═══ You can create a selection box in a view to select all the items in a region. Ensure that Keyboard moves pointer is enabled. To use the keyboard to create a selection box, do one of the following: o Press and hold down the Shift key then use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to create the selection box. o Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region you want to select and press the space bar. Then, move the mouse pointer to the opposite corner, press and hold down the Shift key, and press the space bar to create a selection box. To change the size of the selection box, put the mouse pointer on the square on one side of the box. Then press and hold down the Shift key and move the mouse pointer. You cannot use the keyboard to move the selection box. Therefore, create the box in the region that you want to select in the view. Press the space bar to remove the selection box. This is a selection box surrounding three nodes and two links. ═══ Selecting a region ═══ You use the region selection box to select a region in a view. The region selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object. The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of each side. You can create, change the size of the selection box or move it to any region in the view. To remove the box at any time, click mouse button 1 while the mouse pointer is outside of the box. For keyboard instructions, double-click on keyboard. Creating the Selection Box 1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region of the view you want to select. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. While holding down the mouse button, move the pointer to the opposite corner to create the box. Continue moving the mouse pointer until the box is the size you want. 3. Release the mouse button when the box is the correct size. This is an example of creating a selection box. Changing the Size of the Selection Box You can change the box size by moving one or two sides at a time. To move one side: 1. Move the mouse pointer to a square in the middle of a side of the box. The mouse pointer will change to a sizing pointer. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move that side of the box. To move two sides of the box at once: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two sides meet. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the two sides of the box at once. This is an example of changing the size of a selection box. Moving the Selection Box To move the selection box, do the following: 1. Move the mouse pointer to the inside of the box. The mouse pointer will change to a move pointer. 2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the box in any direction. 3. When the box is in the correct location, release the mouse button. This is an example of moving a selection box. ═══ Text, definition ═══ You can add text to a view. For example, you can add a note, a name, a phone number, or the name of a city. You add text in an entry field in the Add Text window. Up to four separate entries of text can be associated with each node and link. You can also enter free or unassociated text. You can select text individually. ═══ Selecting and deselecting objects ═══ To perform a task, you first select an object and then select the task to apply to that object. You can select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects. You can also use the keyboard to select and deselect an object. Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object To select a single object, move the mouse pointer to the object and click mouse button 1. To select text associated with a node or a link, move the mouse pointer to the text and click mouse button 2. To deselect a single object, click mouse button 1 anywhere in the view except on the selected object. Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects To select a region in a view, you use a selection box. To select more than one object, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you use the mouse to click on the objects you want. To deselect more than one object, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you use the mouse to click on the objects you want to deselect. This is an example of a region of selected objects: ═══ Using the keyboard to select and deselect objects ═══ You can use the keyboard to select and deselect one or more objects. You can select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects. Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object To select a single object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer to the object and press the space bar. To deselect a single object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer to the object. Press the space bar again. Selecting and Deselecting a Group of Objects To select a region in a view, you use a selection box. To select a group of objects, use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the space bar. Repeat this until you finish selecting all the objects you want to select. To deselect a group of objects, use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the space bar to deselect each object. ═══ Tackpoint, definition ═══ A tackpoint is a graphic object that is used as a visual bending point in a link in a view. Tackpoints generally do not represent physical objects and are visible only when the select function is used to select either tackpoints or the links in which they are contained. A visible tackpoint is a small, white square at a bend in a link. Tackpoints can be added, deleted, hidden, and moved. ═══ Using the keyboard to add tackpoints ═══ To use the keyboard to add tackpoints in a view, do the following: 1. Select Add tackpoints in the Edit pull-down menu. The mouse pointer will change to a tackpoint pointer when it is positioned over a link. 2. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position in the link where you want the tackpoint. The link bends as you position the tackpoint. Press the space bar. 3. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view. This picture is an example of what a view looks like after you've added tackpoints. You can exit Add Tackpoints by: o Pressing the Esc key. o Double-clicking mouse button 2. o Selecting Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu. ═══ Unavailable actions, definition ═══ The items that are listed in a pull-down menu from the action bar are sometimes in a muted color, which means that they are not available. An action is not available because an object or region is not selected. For example, you cannot delete an object until you select the object you want to delete. Help is always available for any action, whether or not the action is currently available. To access help, click and hold mouse button 1 on the option, then press F1. If you are using a keyboard, press F10 to move to the action bar, then use the arrow keys to select the option and press F1. ═══ Hop count, definition ═══ The hop count is the number of node-to-node links you want to display for a selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9. For example, to see all the resources that are up to five links away from Resource A, you specify a hop count of 5. ═══ Clipboard, definition ═══ The clipboard is an information area in which you store copied or cut objects. Items in the clipboard are stored there until you paste them into a view or until other information is cut or copied into the clipboard. The new information replaces the current information in the clipboard. Items in the clipboard are invisible until they are pasted into a view. ═══ Node, definition ═══ A node is a graphic symbol in a view. A node represents one resource or a group of resources. A node can be whatever your application program manages, such as a networked computer, a security sensor, or a city. You can select Legend in the Options pull-down menu to see a description of the nodes, links, and status in views. ═══ Resource, definition ═══ A resource is an object in your network. A resource can be either a node or a link. ═══ Link, definition ═══ A link is a resource that represents a connection or relationship between two nodes. You can select Legend in the Options pull-down menu to see a description of the nodes, links, and status in views. ═══ Label, definition ═══ A label is an identifier that the application program associates with a particular node or link. A resource label might be an address, an icon, or a name. You can move, delete, or change a resource label independent of its node or link. You can show or hide these labels at specific zoom levels by selecting Display labels in the View pull-down menu. ═══ Background picture, definition ═══ A background picture is an image that you can add to a view. Background pictures can be complex images, such as maps, floor plans, or school layouts. Background pictures are OS/2 * metafiles. You can add and delete, but not modify, background pictures. OS/2 allows you to convert other picture file types to metafiles. This is an example of a background picture. ═══ Scroll bar, definition ═══ A scroll bar is a narrow section of a view window that allows you to move the view so you can see a part that is not currently displayed. A view window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You can use the vertical scroll bar to move the view display up and down. You can use the horizontal scroll bar to move the view display left and right. The slider box on the scroll bar indicates how much of the view is displayed. When you first open a view, the entire view is displayed. Therefore, the sliders fill both the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You cannot use the slider to move outside the view area. However, by clicking on the scroll bar arrows or using the arrow keys, you can continue to scroll outside of the actual view. To scroll one screen at a time in any direction, click on the area between the slider and the scroll bar arrows. You can also scroll using the keyboard. ═══ Scrolling using the keyboard ═══ You can use the keyboard to scroll one line at a time or one screen at a time. To scroll one line at a time, use the arrow keys. To scroll one screen at a time, use Page Up, Page Down, Ctrl-Page Up (left), or Ctrl-Page Down (right). If the Keyboard moves mouse pointer option is in effect, you must put scroll lock on (press the Scroll Lock key) to use the arrow keys to scroll. ═══ Group, definition ═══ A group is a collection of objects or resources that you can select and manipulate as a single unit. When you select a group, a selection box surrounds all the objects in the group. ═══ Object, definition ═══ An object is an individual graphic unit such as text, in a view. You can move the text associated with a link or a node by clicking mouse button 2 and dragging the text into position. Background pictures and icons are not considered objects. ═══ Asterisk, definition ═══ Use an asterisk (*) to indicate that any text can replace a portion of the word or phrase. For example, you can specify *CP, NCP*, NCP*004. You can also use a question mark (?) to represent a single character in the word or phrase. ═══ Question mark, definition ═══ Use a question mark (?) to indicate that any single character can replace one character in the name. For example, if you are looking for a view named VIEW1234, and cannot remember the 2 or 3, enter VIEW1??4. You can also use an asterisk (*) to replace several characters at once. ═══ EXQ0402E ═══ EXQ0402E An operating system error has occurred. Module Name: name Error Code: code Detect Point: dp The view will or will not continue. Explanation: An error has occurred in an OS/2 * base function call. The message variables are: name The name of the module in which the error occurred. code The error code. dp The line number in the source module where the error was detected. System Action: The error is logged. If the error is severe, the window in which the error occurred will close. User Response: Select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact the IBM Support Center to check records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0403E ═══ EXQ0403E The following operating system error has occurred. error text Module Name: name Error Code: code Detect Point: dp The view will or will not continue. Explanation: An error has occurred in an OS/2 * Presentation Manager * function call. The message variables are: error text The system error codes or return codes that are provided by OS/2. name The name of the module in which the error occurred. code The error code. dp The line number in the source module where the error was detected. System Action: The error is logged. If the error is severe, the window in which the error occurred will close. User Response: Select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact the IBM Support Center to check records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0404W ═══ EXQ0404W Changes will be lost if you do not save the view. Explanation: You have made edits that you have not saved. If you want to keep them, save the view. User Response: Do one of the following: o Select Save to save the edits using the current view name. o Select Save as to save the edits using a new view name. o Select Discard to close the view without saving it. o Select Cancel to not close the view. If the application has closed the view then Cancel is not available. ═══ EXQ0405E ═══ EXQ0405E Unable to zoom to this level. Explanation: Because of system limitations, the view cannot be zoomed in or zoomed out any further. System Action: The zoom is not performed. User Response: Select Cancel to deselect the selected region. ═══ EXQ0406E ═══ EXQ0406E No resources found with the specified search arguments. They may have been deleted or hidden, or they do not exist in the current view. Explanation: The resource you requested is not currently visible or does not exist. User Response: Do one of the following: o Select Retry to retry the command. Ensure that you enter the find search arguments correctly and that the selected resources are not hidden. o Select Cancel to end Find and remove the message box. ═══ EXQ0408W ═══ EXQ0408W You have requested to undo multiple edits. This will undo multiple edit changes made to the view. Explanation: You have requested to remove multiple edit changes that you have made to the entire view since it was last opened, saved, or replaced. You must verify the request. Your application program determines the number of changes that can be removed. System Action: o If you select Undo, multiple edit changes to this view are removed. o If you select Cancel, the view is not changed. User Response: Do one of the following: o Select Undo all to undo multiple edit changes. o Select Cancel to cancel Undo. ═══ EXQ0409W ═══ EXQ0409W You have requested to undo all edits. This will undo any edit changes made to the view. Explanation: Undo all removes any changes you have made to the entire view since it was last opened, saved, or replaced. You must verify the request. System Action: o If you select Undo all, all edits to this view are undone. o If you select Cancel, Undo all is cancelled. User Response: Do one of the following: o Select Undo all to undo all edits. o Select Cancel to cancel Undo all. ═══ EXQ0410E ═══ EXQ0410E There is not enough memory for the last edit. Edit will be ignored. Explanation: You edited a view but the change cannot be logged into the undo list because of insufficient memory. System Action: The change is ignored. User Response: Either close other running application programs to free up some memory, or free space on your hard disk. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Obtain more memory either by closing other application programs that are running on the operating system or by installing more memory. ═══ EXQ0411E ═══ EXQ0411E An error has occurred. Module Name: name Major Error Code: code Minor Error Code: code Detect Point: dp The view will or will not continue. Explanation: The error is logged. An internal error has occurred and the window in which the error occurred might close. The message variables are: name The name of the module in which the error occurred. code The major error code. code The minor error code. dp The line number in the source module where the error was detected. System Action: The error is logged, and the window in which the error occurred will close. User Response: Select Cancel to close the message window. Notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact the IBM Support Center to check records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0414E ═══ EXQ0414E There is not enough memory for the last zoom. The zoom will be ignored. Explanation: The zoom that you performed to the view cannot be logged in the zoom list because of insufficient memory. System Action: The zoom will not be performed. User Response: Select Cancel to close the message window. When you select Cancel, the zoom will also be cancelled. Close other running application programs to free some memory. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Obtain more memory by either installing more memory or closing other application programs on the operating system. ═══ EXQ0416I ═══ EXQ0416I The selected region did not contain any objects of the type expected. The function will be ignored. Explanation: You tried a function on a region that contains no objects of the type required for that action. System Action: The function is ignored. User Response: Select OK to close the message window and cancel the function. ═══ EXQ0417W ═══ EXQ0417W The view does not appear to be initialized. Do you want to continue? Select No to close the view. Explanation: A view that you requested was not formatted correctly. User Response: Do one of the following: o Select Yes to close the message window and try to continue. o Select No to close the view. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Make sure the layout utility was used on the view. ═══ EXQ0418I ═══ EXQ0418I The output device does not support printing of icons. The view will be printed without icons. Explanation: The output device that you selected cannot print icons. This occurs on such devices as plotters. User Response: Select OK to remove the message box and print the view without the icons. ═══ EXQ0420I ═══ EXQ0420I The requested zoom level cannot be displayed because of added objects. Press OK to remove this zoom and display the zoom level prior to the one requested. Explanation: The view contains objects whose coordinates will cause an OS/2 * error in the previous zoom level. User Response: Select OK to remove this zoom from the zoom ring, and display the zoom level prior to the one you requested. ═══ EXQ0421I ═══ EXQ0421I The output device does not support the printing of background pictures with bitmaps. The view will be printed without the background picture. Explanation: You tried to print out a view with a background picture that contained one or more bitmaps. The output device does not support the printing of bitmaps. User Response: Select OK to close the message box and print the view without the background picture. ═══ EXQ0439E ═══ EXQ0439E The graphic facility cannot complete the function because it has run out of memory. The view will or will not continue. Explanation: The graphic facility does not have enough memory to complete your request. System Action: If the error is severe, the window in which the error occurred might close. User Response: Select Cancel to remove the message. Close other running application programs to free some memory. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Obtain more memory either by installing more memory or by closing other application programs in the operating system. ═══ EXQ0440I ═══ EXQ0440I The icon file (file) cannot be opened. The message variable is: file The name of the icon file which could not be opened. System Action: The icon will not display. User Response: Select OK to close the message window and open the view without the icon. System Programmer Response: Ensure that the icon file is in either the current directory or a directory specified in the DPATH statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. ═══ EXQ0441I ═══ EXQ0441I The icon file (file) is not in the proper format. Explanation: The icon file is not in the correct OS/2 * 1.3 format. The message variable is: file The name of the icon file that was not loaded. System Action: The icon will not display. User Response: Select OK to close the message window and open the view without the icon. Ensure that the icon file is in the correct OS/2 1.3 format. System Programmer Response: Ensure that the icon file is valid. Use the OS/2 1.3 Icon Editor to assure the file is in the correct format. ═══ EXQ0442I ═══ EXQ0442I The font (name) of the specified size is not installed. Font point size = point size Explanation: The font of the specified size is not installed. The message variables are: name The name of the font which is not installed. point size The point size of the font. System Action: The default font is used. User Response: Select OK to close the message window and open the view with the system font rather than the name font. System Programmer Response: Ensure that the font is installed on the system by using the OS/2 * font installation utility in the Control Panel. ═══ EXQ0443I ═══ EXQ0443I The system ran out of file handles, or one of the listed help files cannot be found (files). Make sure all help files exist and are in HELP path specified in CONFIG.SYS. Help will not be available. Explanation: If the help file is located in the HELP path, OS/2 * might have run out of file handles. The message variable is: files A list of one or more files which include a help file which could not be found. System Action: The graphic facility continues without help available. User Response: Record the error and then select OK to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0444I ═══ EXQ0444I One of the listed help libraries is invalid (files). Help will not be available. Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program. The message variable is: files A list of one or more help libraries System Action: The graphic facility continues without help available. User Response: Record the error and then select OK to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0445I ═══ EXQ0445I Information Presentation Facility error. Message Code: code mp1: mp1 mp2: mp2 Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program. The message variables are: code Returned from the Information Presentation Facility mp1 Message parameter 1 mp2 Message parameter 2 System Action: The graphic facility continues without help available. User Response: Record the error and then select OK to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0446E ═══ EXQ0446E A field is not in the help subtable. Topic: topic Subtopic: subtopic Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program. The message variables are: topic the help topic subtopic the help subtopic System Action: The graphic facility continues. User Response: Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Check the help subtable definition to ensure that the field is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0447E ═══ EXQ0447E A help panel is not in the help library. Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program. System Action: The graphic facility continues. User Response: Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Check the IPF script file to ensure that the panel is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0448E ═══ EXQ0448E A window ID was not defined in the main help table. Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program. System Action: The graphic facility continues. User Response: Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer. System Programmer Response: Check the help table definition to ensure that the window is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged errors for more information. ═══ EXQ0450E ═══ EXQ0450E An error occurred loading the background picture file (file). Either the file could not be found or it may not be in the background picture format. Explanation: You selected a file in the Add Background Picture window, but the file either was not found or it is not in the correct OS/2 * metafile format. A system error may also cause this message to appear. The message variable is: file The file that could not be added to the view because it either could not be found or it is not in the correct OS/2 metafile format. System Action: o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system returns you to the Add Background Picture window to select another file. o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the Add Background Picture window. User Response: Ensure that you correctly specified the file and that it is in the correct format. Then do one of the following: o Select the Retry pushbutton to return to the window, then select another file. o Select the Cancel pushbutton to cancel Add background picture. System Programmer Response: Ensure that each background picture is in the correct OS/2 metafile format. The file must have been created using a product that produces OS/2 metafiles. If this is the case, the file contains errors and must be recreated. If the suggested actions do not correct the problem, contact your IBM Support Center. ═══ EXQ0453I ═══ EXQ0453I No resources that met the specified search arguments were found in the view. Do you want to search other views? Explanation: The graphic facility is unable to locate any more resources that satisfy the Find request. It will send a request to the application program to search its views. System Action: o If you select the Search pushbutton, the system searches other views. o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the Find window. o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system returns you to the Find window. User Response: You should do the following: o Select Search to have other views searched. o Select Cancel to cancel the Find function. o Select Retry to return to the Find function. ═══ EXQ0454E ═══ EXQ0454E You have entered a non-valid view name. Explanation: You entered a view name in the Save As window, but the name does not conform to view naming conventions. System Action: o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the message window and the Save As window. o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system closes the message window and returns you to the Save As window. User Response: Do the following: o Select Cancel to close the message window and end Save as. o Select Retry to close the message window and return to the Save As window. ═══ EXQ0455E ═══ EXQ0455E You have entered a non-valid view descriptor. Explanation: You entered a view descriptor in the Save As window but the descriptor does not conform to descriptor naming conventions. System Action: The graphic facility continues. User Response: You should do one of the following: o Select Cancel to close the message window and end Save as. o Select Retry to close the message window and return to the Save As window. ═══ Help for Help Menu ═══ Select Help on the action bar to see the following types of help: Using help A brief guide to how to use the help system. Keys help Information about using your keyboard in GraphicsView/2. Help index A list of specific help topics that you can select. General help A brief overview of the product and its functions. ═══ Help for Using help ═══ Select Using help to see descriptions of the help facility, the different types of help available to you, and how to access that help. ═══ Using help ═══ You can access the online help by: o Selecting the item or function and then pressing the F1 key. o Double-clicking on a highlighted word or phrase, or tabbing to the highlighted word or phrase and pressing the Enter key while in a help window. Try it! o Selecting the Help index, in the Help pull-down menu, to see an alphabetical list of topics in the help information. o Locating a phrase with search by selecting Search from the Services pull-down menu of the Help window when you want to find information by looking for certain words. ═══ Success! ═══ You correctly used the highlighted words to get more information. After you read this information, press the Esc key to return to where you were. Press the Esc key now. ═══ Help for Keys help ═══ Select Keys help to see help information about using your keyboard in the GraphicsView/2 program. ═══ Keys help ═══ The keys are listed below in groups according to their function. When two keys are joined by a plus sign (+), hold down the first key while pressing the second key. Graphic Area Keys Use the following keys to move the pointer in the graphic area of a window with the keyboard. Select Keyboard Moves Pointer located under the system menu icon in the upper left corner of your view to use your keyboard to move the pointer. Up Up arrow Down Down arrow Right Right arrow Left Left arrow To move the pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any of the keys above. Window Keys Use the following keys to act on a window. F1 Help F10 or Alt Go to or from the action bar Arrow keys Move among choices on the action bar, in pull-downs, in pop-up windows, or in list boxes End Go to the last choice in a pull-down or the last item in a list box Home Go to the first choice in a pull-down or the first item in a list box Underlined letter Selects choice on the action bar or pull-down menu. Alt+F4 Exit Alt+F5 Restore the window Alt+F7 Move the window Alt+F8 Size the window Alt+F9 Minimize the window Alt+F10 Maximize the window Shift+Esc or Alt+Spacebar Go to or from the system menu Esc Cancel a pull-down or the system menu Dialog Window Keys Use the following keys to act on a dialog window. Enter Perform the action indicated on the selected pushbutton Esc Cancel the pop-up window Spacebar Set a check box on or off or perform the action indicated on the selected pushbutton Tab Move to the next entry field or check box. Editing Keys Use the following keys to perform editing functions. Ctrl+/ Select object types Ctrl+\ Deselect all Alt+Backspace Undo Ctrl+Backspace Undo last x changes Ctrl+Ins Copy Shift+Del Cut Shift+Ins Paste Del Delete the character under the cursor in input fields and selected material when editing a view Backspace (left arrow delete) Delete the character to the left of the cursor in input fields End or Ctrl+Right Arrow Key Move to the end of a field Home or Ctrl+Left Arrow Key Move to the beginning of a field Help Keys Use the following keys to get help from the application, or to get different kinds of help when you are within a help window. F1 Help F2 General help (from within a help window) F9 Keys help (from within a help window) F11 or Shift+F1 Help index (from within a help window) Esc Cancel current help Shift+F10 Help for help (from within a help window) All OS/2* keys are functional while you are using this product. See the OS/2 keys help for a complete list of these keys. ═══ Help for General help ═══ Select General help to see a general overview of the GraphicsView/2 program. ═══ Graphic Facility Help ═══ The GraphicsView/2 program includes a graphic facility that enables you to display a view of objects in a system or a network. There are four categories of actions that are displayed on the action bar of a view. When you select one of the actions from the action bar, the graphic facility displays a pull-down menu that lists the items available for that action. Depending on how you display a view, you can perform tasks, such as monitor views, make editorial changes to views, or print or plot views. Some items in the pull-down menus are not always available to you. These options are grayed out. An item in a pull-down menu is grayed out for the following reason: The item is not available until you select an object or a region on which to take action. For example, you cannot clear an object until you select the object you want to remove. ═══ Using the F1 key ═══ You can get help on action bar and pull-down items by selecting the item and pressing the F1 key. Do one of the following: o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the item on which you want help. Click and hold down mouse button 1, and then press the F1 key. o To use the keyboard to get help, press the F10 key to move to the action bar. Use the arrow keys to select the choice on which you want help, and press the F1 key. You can get help for a field or selectable item in a dialog window. o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the field or item on which you want help and click mouse button 1. Then either move the pointer to the Help pushbutton at the bottom of the dialog window and click mouse button 1, or press the F1 key. o To use the keyboard to get help, tab to the field and press the F1 key. Use the arrow keys to select individual fields or items. To get general help on an entire dialog window, tab to the Help pushbutton, and then click mouse button 1, press the F1 key, or press Enter. ═══ Highlighted Phrases ═══ Many words or phrases are highlighted in color in the help windows. This highlighting indicates that more help information is available on that text. To get help from highlighted words or phrases, do the following: o To use your mouse to get help in a panel, move the pointer to the highlighted word or phrase on which you want help and double-click. o To use the keyboard to get help, tab to the highlighted word or phrase and press the F1 key. Use the arrow keys to select the highlighted words and phrases. After you read the displayed information, press the Esc key to return to where you were. ═══ Application Help ═══ To get an overview of the application program that you are using, select General help in the help pull-down menu, or press F2 while you are in any help window. ═══ Help Index ═══ To see a list of all help topics, select Help index in the Help pull-down menu, or press F11 while you are viewing any help window. o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the topic on which you want help and double-click. o To use the keyboard to get help, use the arrow keys to select the topic. Press Enter. Messages are not listed in the index. Use the Search function to find the help for the message that you want. Substitute the wildcard characters asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for a search that is based on a partial text string. For example, to find all the messages that begin with the letters EXQ, enter EXQ* . ═══ Searching for help ═══ You can use the Search selection from the action bar of a Help window to access the help information for phrases or words. By choosing words that relate to the task you are trying to perform, you can find the help information that you need. For example, if you are trying to copy a resource, you might search on the word copy. To search the help, 1. Bring up any help panel and select Search, in the Services pull-down menu, on the help action bar. 2. In the Search dialog window, select one of the following: o All Sections, to search the text in all the help panels, or o Index, to search the help index, which will also look for synonyms to your search text. 3. Type the word or the phrase about which you want to see information. Substitute the wildcard characters asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for a search that is based on a partial text string. For example, to find all the messages that begin with the letters EXQ, enter EXQ* 4. Then select the Search pushbutton. ═══ Getting Help for Messages ═══ You can receive two types of messages while you are using the GraphicsView/2 program at your workstation. Following is a description of these types of messages and how to get help on them. Presentation Manager Pop-up Messages These messages come up in a pop-up window while you are in the Presentation Manager * environment. To get help for such a message, click on the Help pushbutton in the window. If you record the message number, you can get help for the message after you have closed its window by doing the following: 1. Bring up any help panel and select Search, located under Services on the help action bar. 2. On the Search dialog window, select All Sections and type in the message number. Enter the message number exactly, including the message number's prefix and suffix, or substitute the wildcard characters asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for part of the message number. For example, enter EXQ* to see a list of all error messages beginning with the letters EXQ. If you want to see the help for message EXQ0405E, then you could enter the message number exactly. If you forget the suffix and do not substitute a wildcard character, you will not find the message. 3. Then select the Search pushbutton. OS/2 Pop-up Messages Some messages come up on an OS/2 * full screen. To get help on an OS/2 pop-up message, do the following: 1. Note the error number, such as EXQ0402 2. Now press Enter. You will be returned to the Presentation Manager environment. 3. Next bring up an OS/2 full screen. 4. From the command prompt, type the following: help yyynnnn where yyy is the prefix of the message (such as EXQ) and nnnn is the number of the message. For example, typing: help EXQ0402 would display the help for message EXQ0402. Occasionally, you will see messages with both reasons and reason codes. In most cases, these reason codes are already explained in the reason text, so you can ignore them. However, if the reason is unknown, these OS/2 reason codes provide valuable information you can use to find the problem. The help for the message will tell you where to find more information on the reason code. ═══ ═══ Trademark of IBM Corporation